InterLink Split-Mount Manual

USER MANUAL
InterLink Split-Mount XT
B4054
Rev. A
Section I
System Description
Section II
Installation
Section III
Commissioning
Section IV
Operators Guide
Section V
Fault Finding
Section VI
Unit Replacement
Section VII
Appendices
Nera Networks AS
This page is intentionally left blank

2
B4054
List of Revisions
Rev.
A
B4054
Date
What is changed
27-09-2004
Initial Version
Rev.
Date
What is changed
B4054
WARNING!
Exposure to strong high frequency electromagnetic fields may cause
thermal damage to personnel. The eye (Cornea and lens) is easily exposed.
Any unnecessary exposure is undesirable and should be avoided.
In Radio-Relay communication installations, orderly setup for normal operation, the general RF radiation level will be well below the safety limit.
In the antennas and directly in front of them the RF intensity normally will
exceed the danger level, within limited portions of space.
Dangerous radiation may be found in the neighbourhood of open waveguide
flanges or horns where the power is radiated into space.
To avoid dangerous radiation the following precautions must be taken:
B4054
During work within and close to the front of the antenna;

make sure that transmitters will remain turned off.
Before opening coaxial - or waveguide connectors carrying

RF power, turn off transmitters.
Consider any incidentally open RF connector as carrying

power, until otherwise proved. Do not look into coaxial
connectors at closer than reading distance (30 cm). Do not
look into an open waveguide unless you are absolutely sure
that the power is turned off.

6
B4054
WARNING!
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to "ESD" (Electro

Static Discharge).
It is therefore essential that whenever disassembling the equipment and/or
handling PC boards, special precautions to avoid ESD have to be made.
These precautions include personnel grounding, grounding of work bench,
grounding of tools and instruments as well as transport and storage in
special antistatic bags and boxes.
B4054

8
B4054
WARNING!
DO NOT remove or insert the Transceiver group with DC power on.
To avoid traffic disturbance during maintenance on one of the RF

channels in a N+1 protected system, the traffic should be manually
locked to the protection channel before any work is started.
B4054

10
B4054
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

IEC825-2: 1993
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other

than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
The Optical Interface must only be serviced by qualified personnel, who

are aware of the hazards involved to repair Laser products.
When handling Laser products the following precautions must be taken:
r Never look directly into an open connector or optical cable
r Before disconnecting an optical cable from the optical transmitter,
the power should be switched off. If this is not possible, the cable
must be disconnected from the transmitter before it is disconnected from the receiver.
r When the cable is reconnected it must be connected to the
receiver before it is connected to the transmitter.
B4054
11

12
B4054
WARNING!
This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the

d.c. supply circuit and the earthing conductor.
LITHIUM BATTERY WARNING!

Caution. Danger of Explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
B4054
13

14
B4054
This section applies only to CE marked equipment
0889
WARNING:
Use of this equipment requires a separate
license to be applied for by the operator.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (INFORMAL)

English
Finnish
Dutch
French
Swedish
Danish
German
Hereby, Nera Networks AS, declares that this InterLink is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Nera Networks AS vakuuttaa tten ett InterLink tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/
EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Hierbij verklaart Nera Networks AS dat het toestel InterLink in overeenstemming is met
de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG
Bij deze verklaart Nera Networks AS dat deze InterLink voldoet aan de essentile eisen
en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC.
Par la prsente Nera Networks AS dclare que lappareil InterLink est conforme aux
exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Par la prsente, Nera Networks AS dclare que ce InterLink est conforme aux exigences
essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables.
Hrmed intygar Nera Networks AS att denna InterLink str I verensstmmelse med de
vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv
1999/5/EG.
Undertegnede Nera Networks AS erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr InterLink overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF
Hiermit erklrt Nera Networks AS, dass sich dieser InterLink in bereinstimmung mit
den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. (BMWi)
Hiermit erklrt Nera Networks AS die bereinstimmung des Gertes InterLink mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG. (Wien)
Refer to Declaration of Conformity for further details.
B4054
15

16
B4054
B4054
17
18
B4054
B4054
19

20
B4054
Table of contents
SECTION I............................................................ 31
1.0
Introduction ................................................................. 33
2.0
System
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.2.1
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
3.0
Unit Descriptions ........................................................ 45

3.1
Modem Board .................................................. 45
3.2
Electrical Interface Baseband Boards ............. 47
3.2.1
2NCS590A/B/D-EL1, 155 Mb/s and 2 Mb/s wayside ..48
3.2.2
2NCS590C-EL3, 3x45/34 Mb/s and
1.5/2 Mb/s wayside ......................................... 49
3.3
SVCE Board .................................................... 50
3.4
Supervisory Board .......................................... 52
3.5
Auxiliary Services Board ................................. 54
3.6
Power Filtering Board ...................................... 56
3.7
Indoor Outdoor Interface Unit .......................... 58
3.8
Alarm Display & Relay Board .......................... 60
3.9
Optical Interface Baseband Boards ................ 62
3.10
Interface Baseband Board, 3 x DS3/E3 .......... 65
3.11
Transceiver ..................................................... 67
B4054
Overview ........................................................
System Configurations ....................................
Definitions and terms used ..............................
Modes of operation ..........................................
Available system configurations ......................
System Layouts ..............................................
Definitions and terms used ..............................
Main racks .......................................................
ETSI and 19 variants .....................................
IDU ..................................................................
Auxiliary Subrack ............................................
IOIU Shelf ........................................................
ODU ................................................................
34
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
40
41
41
42
21
SECTION II ........................................................... 69
1.0
Basic Planning ............................................................

1.1
Installation Material ..........................................
1.2
Installation Tools .............................................
1.3
Outline Dimensions .........................................
1.3.1
Rack dimensions, ETSI ..................................
1.3.1.1 2200 mm..........................................................
1.3.1.2 2100 mm..........................................................
1.3.1.3 1700 mm..........................................................
1.3.2
Rack dimensions, 19" .....................................
1.3.3
Waveguide flange dimensions .........................
71
72
74
75
75
75
76
77
78
79
2.0
Transportation & Handling ........................................

2.1
Packing ...........................................................
2.2
Transportation .................................................
2.3
Handling ..........................................................
2.4
Inspection ........................................................
80
80
80
80
80
3.0
Equipment Rack Installation ......................................

3.1
General ...........................................................
3.2
Procedure........................................................
3.3
Power & Grounding .........................................
3.3.1
Rack Top Connections ...................................
3.3.2
AUX Subrack Power Connections ..................
3.3.3
Internal Power Distribution ..............................
3.3.3.1 2+1 Terminals .................................................
3.3.3.2 2+1 Terminals with AUX Subrack ...................
3.3.3.3 3+1 Terminals .................................................
3.3.3.4 3+1 Terminals with AUX Subrack ...................
81
81
81
84
84
85
86
86
87
88
89
4.0
ODU Installation ..........................................................

4.1
Mounting to Column.........................................
4.2
Transceiver attachment ..................................
4.3
ODU mounting on 2m and 2.4m antennas ......
4.4
ODU mounting on 3m and 3.7m antennas ......
90
90
91
92
93
22
B4054
5.0
Waveguide Installation ............................................... 94

5.1
Waveguide ...................................................... 94
6.0
IDU/ODU Cable Installation ........................................ 96
SECTION III .......................................................... 99

1.0
External Connections .................................................

1.1
Phone Connections .........................................
1.2
LAN Connections ............................................
1.3
NI Connections ...............................................
1.4
LCT1 Connection ............................................
1.5
LCT2 Connection ............................................
1.6
Alarm Connections ..........................................
1.7
Power Connections .........................................
1.8
Internal Power Distribution ..............................
1.9
External Connections ......................................
1.10
SU Serial Channels .........................................
1.11
Board Interface ................................................
1.11.1 Slot numbering and board placement ..............
1.11.2 Service Board PABX .......................................
1.11.3 Service Board (without PABX) ........................
1.11.4 Auxiliary Services Board .................................
1.11.5 Interface Baseband Boards.............................
1.11.6 Modem Board STM-1 ......................................
1.12
Interface Baseband Board, 3 x DS3/E3 ..........
2.0
Configuration .............................................................. 137

2.1
Setting of Subrack address ............................. 137
3.0
Power on (incl. NEW-NMS start-up and initial config.) 139

3.1
General ........................................................... 139
3.2
Power on ......................................................... 139
3.3
NEW-Configurator Start-up and
connecting to Network Elements .................... 139
3.3.1
Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with
Serial Connection (RS-232/ LCT). .................. 140
B4054
101
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
122
125
127
129
131
133
135
23
3.3.2
3.4
4.0

TCP/IP Connection. ........................................ 140
Initial configuration ........................................... 141
Antenna alignment ......................................................

4.1
Procedure for Coarse-alignment .....................
4.2
Procedure for Fine-alignment ..........................
4.3
Cross Polarization Adjustment ........................
4.4
Final Control ....................................................
142
142
142
144
144
SECTION IV ......................................................... 145

1.0
Introduction .................................................................
1.1
NEW ................................................................
1.1.1
Versions ..........................................................
1.1.1.1 NEW-NMS ......................................................
1.1.1.2 NEW-Configurator ...........................................
1.1.2
Graphical User Interface (GUI) .......................
1.1.2.1 Menus .............................................................
1.1.2.2 Explorer View ..................................................
1.1.2.3 Physical View ..................................................
1.1.2.4 Schematic View ..............................................
1.1.3
Communication ...............................................
1.1.3.1 Discovering Network Elements .......................
1.1.3.2 Communication Settings .................................
1.1.3.3 Serial Port Settings..........................................
1.1.3.4 TCP/IP Port Settings .......................................
147
147
147
147
148
148
148
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
2.0
Configuration ..............................................................
2.1.1
NE Node .....................................................
2.1.1.1
System Configuration and Unit Housekeeping .
2.1.1.1.1 Alarms ........................................................
2.1.1.1.2 Supported systems and boards/units .........
2.1.1.1.3 Board/Unit placement rules ........................
2.1.1.1.4 Unit Housekeeping Wizard .........................
2.1.1.1.5 System Change Detected ..........................
2.1.1.1.6 New Board Detected ..................................
156
156
156
156
157
159
160
165
165
24
B4054
2.1.1.1.7
2.1.1.2
2.1.1.3
2.1.1.4
2.1.1.5
2.1.1.6
2.1.1.7
2.1.1.8
2.1.1.9
2.1.1.9.1
2.1.1.9.2
2.1.1.10
2.1.1.11
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
2.1.2.2
2.1.2.2.1
2.1.2.2.2
2.1.2.2.3
2.1.2.2.3.1
2.1.2.2.4
2.1.2.2.4.1
2.1.2.2.5
2.1.2.2.5.1
2.1.2.2.6
2.1.2.2.6.1
2.1.2.2.6.2
2.1.2.3
2.1.2.4
2.1.2.5
2.1.2.6
2.1.2.7
2.1.3
2.1.3.1
2.1.3.1.1
2.1.3.1.2
2.1.3.1.3
2.1.3.1.4
B4054
Replacing Boards/Units: ............................. 166

Element ID .................................................. 167
Available Functions .................................... 169
Notifications ................................................ 170
NE Clock .................................................... 171
Configuration Upload .................................. 173
Configuration Download.............................. 175
Restore Configuration ................................. 176
SW Versions .............................................. 176
Supervisory Board ...................................... 177
Board/Unit ................................................... 178
SW Download ............................................. 181
Remote Reset............................................. 183
Equipment Node ......................................... 184
NNP Routing .............................................. 184
IP Routing ................................................... 188
General Settings ......................................... 189
Active Routes ............................................. 191
Static Routes .............................................. 192
"Add Static Route" and "Edit Static Route" dialogues . 193
RIP Interfaces............................................. 194
"Add RIP Interface" and "Edit RIP Interface" dialogues 196
OSPF Interfaces ......................................... 197
"Add OSPF Interface" and "Edit OSPF Interface" dialogues . 198
OSPF Areas ............................................... 199
"Add OSPF Area" and "Edit OSPF Area" dialogues ...200
"Add OSPF Area Network Range" and
"Edit OSPF Area Network Range" dialogues 201
Communication Ports ................................. 203
Antenna ...................................................... 211
Frequency .................................................. 212
Looping ....................................................... 215
OSI Settings ............................................... 217
Supervisory Board Node ............................ 221
Protection Switching ................................... 221
Switch Section ............................................ 221
Switch Criteria ............................................ 222
N+1 Systems.............................................. 224
Switch Configuration ................................... 226
25
2.1.3.1.5
2.1.3.1.6
2.1.3.1.7
2.1.3.1.8
2.1.3.2
2.1.3.3
2.1.4
2.1.4.1
2.1.4.2
2.1.4.3
2.1.4.3.1
2.1.4.3.1.1
2.1.4.3.1.2
2.1.4.3.1.3
2.1.4.3.1.4
2.1.4.4
2.1.4.5
2.1.4.6
2.1.4.7
2.1.5
2.1.5.1
2.1.5.2
2.1.5.3
2.1.5.4
2.1.6
2.1.6.1
2.1.7
2.1.7.1
2.1.7.2
2.1.7.3
2.1.7.4
2.1.7.4.1
2.1.7.4.2
2.1.7.5
2.1.7.6
2.1.8
2.1.8.1
2.1.9
2.1.10
26
Manual Switch Control ................................

Hot Stand-by Systems ...............................
Switch Configuration ...................................
Manual Switch Control ................................
Diagnose ....................................................
Production Data ..........................................
XCVR Unit Node ........................................
RF Power ...................................................
Frequency ..................................................
Space Diversity ..........................................
Space Diversity Combiner Statistics ..........
Dispersion Graph .......................................
Persistent polling ........................................
Automatic logging of data ............................
Versatile graphs ..........................................
DRO Tuning ...............................................
Looping .......................................................
Diagnose ....................................................
Production Data ..........................................
Modem Board Node ....................................
Error Pulse Output ......................................
Looping .......................................................
Diagnose ....................................................
Production Data ..........................................
Modem Board - Radio Port Node................
BER Thresholds .........................................
Interface Baseband Board Node ................
Available Functions ....................................
DS3/E3 Looping ..........................................
Wayside Channel .......................................
Looping .......................................................
Main Loops .................................................
Wayside Channel Loops and PRBS Settings
Diagnose ....................................................
Production Data ..........................................
Interface Board - Optical Port Node ...........
Laser Control ..............................................
DS3/E3 Configuration .................................
DS3/E3 Frame Structure Configuration ......
229
232
234
235
238
241
242
242
244
245
248
249
250
250
251
252
253
255
257
258
258
259
261
261
261
261
263
263
264
266
268
268
270
271
271
272
272
274
276
B4054
2.1.11
2.1.11.1
2.1.11.2
2.1.11.3
2.1.11.4
2.1.11.5
2.1.11.6
2.1.12
2.1.12.1
2.1.13
2.1.13.1
2.1.14
2.1.14.1
2.1.14.2
2.1.14.3
2.1.14.4
2.1.14.5
2.1.14.6
SVCE Board Node .....................................

Available Functions ....................................
64kb/s Channels .........................................
Telephone Settings .....................................
Looping .......................................................
Diagnose ....................................................
Production Data ..........................................
Transmission RX Interface Nodes .............
AIS Insert ....................................................
Transmission TX Interface Nodes ..............
Path Trace ..................................................
SOH Frame ................................................
System Description ....................................
DCC............................................................
Wayside Channel .......................................
64kb/s Channels .........................................
SVCE Telephone ........................................
SOH Selection Dialogue box ......................
278
279
280
282
286
287
289
290
290
292
292
294
294
296
296
297
297
298
3.0
Alarm Management .....................................................

3.1
Alarm Data Acquisition ....................................
3.2
Alarm Severity Levels .....................................
3.3
Current Alarms ................................................
3.3.1
Current Alarms View .......................................
3.4
Historical Alarm Data ......................................
3.4.1
NE Alarm Log Manager ...................................
3.4.2
NE Alarm Log View .........................................
3.4.3
Database Logging ...........................................
3.5
Alarm Edit ........................................................
300
300
300
302
302
303
303
304
305
306
4.0
Performance Measurements ...................................... 308

4.1
Measurement Types ....................................... 308
4.2
Measurement Nodes ....................................... 310
4.3
Cumulative Measurements ............................. 311
4.4
Periodic Measurements (15Min, 24Hour and Month) ...313
4.5
Thresholds ...................................................... 314
4.6
Database Logging ........................................... 315
B4054
27
5.0
Analog Measurements ................................................ 316

5.1
Analog measurements .................................... 316
5.2
RF Statistics .................................................... 317
6.0
Security Management .................................................

6.1
User Account Administration...........................
6.1.1
Add User .........................................................
6.1.2
Edit User .........................................................
6.1.3
Delete User .....................................................
6.1.4
Change Password...........................................
6.2
Security Event Logging ...................................
6.2.1
NE Security Log Manager ...............................
6.2.2
NE Security Log View .....................................
6.2.3
Database Logging ...........................................
7.0
Operation ..................................................................... 327

7.1
Handset ........................................................... 327
8.0
Frequency setting .......................................................

8.1
Setting of Frequency .......................................
8.2
DRO Tuning ....................................................
8.2.1
Tx ....................................................................
8.2.2
Rx ....................................................................
319
319
320
321
322
323
324
324
325
326
329
330
332
333
335
SECTION V .......................................................... 337

1.0
Alarms and Description .............................................. 339
SECTION VI ......................................................... 361

1.0
28
Replacement of Boards/Units ....................................

1.1
Replacement Rules .........................................
1.2
Replacement procedures ................................
1.2.1
Transceiver Unit, Modem Board,
Interface Baseband Board, SVCE Board ........
1.2.2
Supervisory Board ..........................................
363
363
363
363
363
B4054
2.0
Unit Removal ............................................................... 365
Section VII ............................................................ 367

Appendix I
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
B4054
Frequency Plans ................................................

5 GHz ..............................................................
Lower 6 GHz ...................................................
Upper 6 GHz ...................................................
7 GHz ..............................................................
8 GHz ..............................................................
11 GHz ............................................................
369
369
370
371
372
378
381
29

30
B4054
System Description
SECTION I
System Description
B4054
31

32
B4054
System Description
1.0
Introduction
The InterLink STM-1 Split-Mount radio-relay equipment is designed to be
used in the frequency bands from L6 to 11GHz. Available configurations
include 1+0 to 4+0 (unprotected) and 1+1 to 3+1, including Hot Stand-by
(protected). Space Diversity and Co-Channel/XPIC are optionally included.
Built-in supervision system enables easy installation and configuration,
and system status and availability data may be recorded. Advanced management with standardised use of the Embedded Control Channel (ECC)
allows for easy remote access to the equipment.
The equipment specifications are in accordance with relevant international standards issued by ITU, ETSI and IEC.
Key features
Compact, flexible and makes installation easy
ETSI and 19 mounting
Prepared for future expansion
Unprotected systems: 1+0 to 4+0
Protected systems: 1+1 to 3+1, including Hot Stand-by (HSB)
Space Diversity operation
Co-Channel/XPIC operation (for 2-channel systems)
ACAP (Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarisation), ACCP (Adjacent
Channel Co-Polarisation) and CCDP (Co-Channel Dual Polarised)
operational modes
28, 29.65 and 40 MHz channel arrangements
Low power consumption
High system gain
Automatic/Manual Transmitter Power Control (ATPC/MTPC)
Modem Board supporting both 64TCM and 128TCM modulation
Electrical and optical STM-1 interfaces
2 Mb/s (E1) wayside channels
Service Channel / Engineering OrderWire, including PABX
64 kb/s insert channels
Built in diagnostics with local and remote loopback
Standardised use of the Embedded Control Channel (ECC)
SNMP via NEW-NMS, and OSPF
Interface for local and sub-network management (LAN)
B4054
33
2.0
System Overview
This chapter gives an overview of the different system configurations
supported by the InterLink XT radio-relay equipment, and describes the
layout of the various configurations.
2.1
System Configurations
2.1.1
Definitions and terms used

The following definitions and terms are used:
N+0 systems:
Unprotected systems consisting of N (1 N 4)

parallel and equivalent radio channels.
N+1 systems:
Protected systems consisting of N (1 N 3) parallel

and equivalent radio channels, all protected by a
common protection channel (+1). The access to and
use of the protection channel is controlled by an
integrated Radio Protection System (RPS). N+1 systems can also be equipped with additional Interface
Baseband Boards in order to use the protection
channel for Low Priority Traffic (LPT).
Hot Stand-by (HSB): Protected system consisting of 2 transceivers,

both enabled for using the same RF-channel. The
transmitter which actually transmits, is selected by
a RF-switch located between the transmitter and
the RF-channel filter. At the receive side, both
receivers are fed with an identical signal from a
RF-splitter located between the RF-channel filter
and the receivers. Baseband switching is performed
identically to an ordinary 1+1 system.
HSBDual
34
Baseband
As ordinary Hot Stand-by, but with an additional

Interface Baseband Board, excluding baseband Txsplitting and Rx-switching.
B4054
System Description
2.1.2
Modes of operation
The InterLink XT radio-relay equipment supports ACAP (Adjacent Channel
Alternate Polarisation), ACCP (Adjacent Channel Co-Polarisation) and
CCDP (Co-Channel Dual Polarised) operational modes.
2.1.3
Available system configurations

The following table defines the p.t. available system configurations. Dark
shaded squares indicate impossible or non-supported configurations.
Terminal
Configurations
1+0
1+1
HSB
HSBDual Baseband
2+0
2+1
3+0
3+1
4+0
ACAP/ACCP
1 Pol
2 Pols
x
x
x
x
x
Double-Terminal
CCDP
XPIC
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
ACAP/ACCP
1 Pol
2 Pols
CCDP
XPIC
x
x
x
x
x
Table 2.1.3.1 Available system configurations
B4054
35
2.2
2.2.1
System Layouts
Definitions and terms used
The following definitions and terms are used:
36
Main rack:
ETSI or 19 rack which is used for the construction of terminals.
Subrack:
Basic system building block. Several variants can

be used for building the different system configurations.
Auxiliary Subrack:
Subrack in a predefined position in the top of the

main rack (see Figure 2.2.2.1), containing Power
Filtering Boards for separate power supplies to
each transceiver. The Auxiliary Subrack is optional.
IOIU Shelf:
Shelf in a predefined position located abow Subrack A (see Figure 2.2.2.1), containing IOIU for
interface between the IDU and ODU. The IOIU
Shelf is optional.
Subrack A:
Standard subrack in a predefined position as the

upper subrack in the main rack (see Figure
2.2.2.1).
Subrack B:
Standard subrack in a predefined position as the

lower subrack in the main rack (see Figure
2.2.2.1).
B4054
System Description
2.2.2
Main racks
2.2.2.1
ETSI and 19 variants

All available system configurations are by default to be mounted in ETSIracks.
19 mounting is also supported by removing the adaptors on each side of
the different subracks. Nera offers an adaptor kit which transforms a
standard Nera ETSI-rack into a 19-rack.
The subrack can be (optionally) mounted freestanding.
Neras standard ETSI-rack and corresponding 19-rack variant are shown
in the figure below. Note that the ETSI- and 19-rack have slightly
different location of the subracks due to the different standardized mounting
modules. Other rack heights can be used (optional / customers special
requirements), according to table 2.2.2.1.
Dimensions
(H x W = 600 x D = 300 [mm])
Assembled Unassembled
H = 2200
H = 2200
H = 2100
H = 2100
H = 1700
H = 1700
H = 2200
ETSI
X
X
X
X
X
X
6W
DQGDUG
X
2 SW
LRQDO
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 2.2.2.1 Main rack variants
B4054
37
Auxiliary Subrack, IOIU shelf, Subrack A and Subrack B are all predefined
mounting positions in the main racks.
Aux Subrack
Aux Subrack
Aux Subrack
IO IU Shelf
Subrack A
Subrack A
Subrack A
Subrack B
Subrack B
Fig. 2.2.2.1
38
Nera ETSI-rack (left) and corresponding 19-rack variant (middle)

Rack with IOIU shelf (right)
B4054
System Description
Fig. 2.2.2.2
B4054
Rack mounted equipment (1+1 terminal)

39
2.2.3
IDU
The baseband subrack contains all units required for customer interfaces,
as well as interface(s) to the transceiver(s), and includes;
Connection Panel Smaller Systems, Power Filtering Board(s), Alarm
Display & Relay Board, Supervisory Board, Modem Board(s),
Interface Baseband Board(s), SVCE Board(s) (optional), Auxiliary Services Board(s) (optional) and Indoor Outdoor Interface Unit(s).
Figure 2.2.3. shows a 2+1 IDU.
External Connectors
10
9
INTFC A
ON
ON
IN
IN
IDU
POWER
OUT
OUT
OFF
48VDC
PWR
OFF
48VDC
INDOOR OUTDOOR INTERFACE UNIT
POWER
PWR
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
POWER
ON
OUT
4
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC B
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
OUTPUT
INTFC C
INTFC B
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OU TPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OU TPUT
OUT PUT
OU TPUT
OUT PUT
OUT PUT
OUTPUT
ODU
PWR
ON
OFF
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
SVCE BD
SUPERVISORY BD
RMV
RST
MODEM BD
RMV
RST
INTERFACE BASEBAND BD
RMV
RST
MODEM BD
48VDC
5
INTFC A
IN
OFF
6
INTFC A
PWR
7
INTFC A
INTFC B
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
8
INTFC A
IDU
MODEM BD
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
PWR
ON
OFF
TRANSCEIVER POWER CONNECTIONS

TB2
TB3
IC1
S1
GND
+ -
GND
GND +
GND
Fig. 2.2.3
40
J2 (SU TEST)
Plug-in Units
Indoor Outdoor Interface Units
J1 (EXT CON)
ON
Power filter
External Connectors
2+1 IDU (the covers are omitted)

B4054
System Description
2.2.4
Auxiliary Subrack
An Auxiliary Subrack includes Power Filtering Board(s) for separate power
supplies and filtering to each transceiver. The Auxiliary Subrack is optional.
Figure 2.2.4. shows the Auxiliary Subrack.
Fig. 2.2.4
2.2.5
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
OFF
OFF
OF F
OFF
OFF
OFF
Auxiliary Subrack (the front cover is omitted)
IOIU Shelf
An IOIU Shelf includes IOIU units for interface between the IDU and ODU.
The IOIU Shelf is optional. Figure 2.2.5. shows the IOIU Shelf.
ON
48VDC
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
OFF
POWER
IN
48VDC
PWR
OUT
OFF
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
ODU
ODU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ON
O FF
48VDC
INDOOR OUT DOOR INTERFACE UNIT
IDU
POWER
IN
INVENTORY
CONTROL
OFF
48VDC
PWR
OUT
ODU
ON
IN
IDU
POW ER
OUT
O FF
48VDC
PWR
ON
INVENTO RY
CONTROL
POW ER
IN
IN
IDU
PWR
OUT
OUT
OFF
48VDC
POWER
ON
B4054
ON
IOIU Shelf mounted in Nera rack
PW R
Fig. 2.2.5.2
POWER
IN
Fig. 2.2.5.1
48VDC
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
OFF
PWR
OUT
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ON
IN
IN
48VDC
IDU
POWER
OUT
OUT
OFF
PWR
ON
POWER
PWR
IDU
ODU
INVENTORY
CONTRO L
ODU
IOIU Shelf for mounting in standard ETSI or 19" racks
41
2.2.6
ODU
The Outdoor Unit contains 1 or 2 transceivers and branching. One ODU is
sufficient for 1+0, 1+1, HSB and 2+0 systems. In 2+1, 3+0, 3+1 and 4+0
systems, 2 ODUs are required.
U-BOLT
WASHER
NUT
COUNTER NUT
HINGE
WASHER
Transceiver 2
NUT
WASHER
NUT
COUNTER NUT
Branching Unit
FASTENING SCREW
Transceiver 1
1+0
1+1
HSB
2+0
Fig. 2.2.6.1
42
TRANSCEIVER 1
TRANSCEIVER 2
Ch1
ChP
Ch1
Ch1
X
Ch1
Ch2
Ch2
Exploded view of the ODU
B4054
System Description
Transceiver connector covers in
storage position
Waveguide flange Main
IDU-ODU Cable connector for

Transceiver 1
AGC connector for Transceiver 1

Transceiver connector for
Transceiver 2
Fig. 2.2.6.2
Branching Unit, Bottom view
Fig. 2.2.6.3
ODU Assembled
B4054
Waveguide flange Space Div.

or Main in double Term config.
43
1+0 Space Diversity
1+0 Space Diversity

Double Terminal
1+1 Space Diversity
Fig. 2.2.6.4
44
Branching examples
B4054
System Description
3.0
3.1
B4054
Unit Descriptions
Modem Board
45
8x19.44 Mb/s
Data, Clock
and Sync.
(x4)
BUS
selection
Rx
8x19.44 Mb/s
Data, Clock
and Sync.
8x19.44 Mb/s
Data, Clock
and Sync.
4x38.88 Mb/s
Data, Clock
4x38.88 Mb/s
Data, Clock
DC supply voltages
Control & Detector Signals
DC/DC
Converters
ACF
350 MHz
TCM Modulator
TCM Demodulator
Modem/Transceiver
comm. Interface
140 MHz
Frequency Multiplexer
(x4)
BUS
selection
Tx
SOH Processing
8x19.44 Mb/s
Data, Clock
and Sync.
Tx=350 MHz
IF
Rx=140 MHz
MT com.
48 VDC
The Modem Board has the following main functions:

TCM modulator TCM demodulator Alarm and Configuration Function
(ACF) Modem/ Transceiver Communication (MTCOM) SOH processing of the incoming and outgoing STM-1 data Multiplexing of incomingand outgoing STM-1 data Power supply
Modulator:
Inserting SOH data and scrambling.
Mapping the STM-1 data according to a Trellis coding scheme.
Spectrum shaping by FIR-filtering.
Modulation of the 350 MHz carrier with a TCM signal.
Demodulator:
Demodulation of the 140 MHz TCM signal.
Carrier- and clock- regeneration.
Slope equalising and channel filtering
Adaptive transversal filtering
Cross polarisation cancelling of Co-Channel. (Optional).
Decoding of the Trellis coded signal
Descrambling and accessing the SOH in the STM-1 frame.
ACF:
ASIC configuration and management.
Monitoring of alarms and internal status.
Control of analogue functions.
Assisting in testing of modem functionality.
MTCOM:
To enable the ACF to communicate with the transceiver.
DC supply:
To convert the 48V battery voltage to +5V and +3.3V.
46
B4054
System Description
3.2
B4054
Electrical Interface Baseband Boards
47
75 ohm
2NCS590A/B/D-EL1, 155 Mb/s and 2 Mb/s wayside
155Mb/s
Interface
to / from Modem
3.2.1
Overhead
Radio Processor
2 Mb/s
Interface
120 ohm bal
Alarm and Control function
SOH bus
Board reset switch
TEMP
SENSORS
DCC channels
P
Alarm LED (red)
Power LED (green)
Inventory
Data
These variants have the following main functions:

Main customer traffic interfaces in the InterLink radio-relay system.
Customer traffic connected trough the connection panel.
Customer interfaces are 155 Mb/s STM-1 and 2 Mb/s Wayside. Both
interfaces comply with ITU-T rec. G.703.
DCC channels in the 155Mb/s overhead traffic may be extracted/
inserted on the IBB via the SU Board. The DCC-data rates are 64kb/s,
192kb/s or 576kb/s.
64kb/s traffic may be inserted/extracted in the 155Mb/s overhead via
the SVCE Board. The SOH bus carries the 64kb/s traffic between the
SVCE board and the IBB board.
Alarm and Control Function (ACF) is a local part of the InterLink
supervisory system. The ACF provides control, configuration and status
information collection on the IBB.
48
B4054
System Description
7 5 o hm
2NCS590C-EL3, 3x45/34 Mb/s and 1.5/2 Mb/s wayside

155M b/s
Interface
to / from Modem
3.2.2
O v erh ead
R adio Processor
2 M b/s
Interface
1 20 oh m bal
SO H bus
7 5 o hm
3x 34/45 M b/s
Interface
D igital C ross
C on nect (D X C )
D C C channels
A larm an d C o ntrol fu n ctio n

Bo ard reset sw itch
TEM P
S EN S O R S
P
A larm L E D (red )
Po w er L E D (green)
Inv ento ry
D ata
This variant has the following main functions:

Main customer traffic interfaces in the InterLink radio-relay system.
Customer traffic connected through the connection panel (STM-1 and Wayside) and via front mounted connectors (3 x 34/45 Mb/s).
Customer interfaces on the board are 155 and 3x45/34 Mb/s traffic and
1.5/2 Mb/s wayside traffic. All interfaces comply with ITU-T rec. G.703.
Customer interfaces are 155 Mb/s STM-1, 2/1.5 Mb/s Wayside and 3 x 34/45
Mb/s. All interfaces comply with ITU-T rec. G.703.
34/45 Mb/s channels can be added and dropped both in the line and in the radio
directions, or act as a terminal mux only.
The mux can be synchronized from the line side, from the radio side or from a
free-running local oscillator.
DCC channels in the 155Mb/s overhead traffic may be extracted/inserted on the
IBB via the SU Board. The DCC-data rates are 64kb/s, 192kb/s or 576kb/s.
64kb/s traffic may be inserted/extracted in the 155Mb/s overhead via the SVCE
Board. The SOH bus carries the 64kb/s traffic between the SVCE board and the
IBB board.
Alarm and Control Function (ACF) is a local part of the InterLink supervisory
system. The ACF provides control, configuration and status information collection on the IBB.
B4054
49
3.3
50
SVCE Board
B4054
System Description
PABX Connection
Temperatures
PABX-ADAPTER
Voltages
Alarms
-48V
DC/DC
Other Equipment 1
Other Equipment 2
Int. Teleph. No.

Ext. Teleph. No.
REG. -5.0V
Engineering Order Wire
4-Wire
Call Inp/Outp
Controll Inp/Outp
SERVICE
CHANNEL
E/M-Wire
Inventory data
+3.3V
+5.0V
+12.0V
-12.0V
PABX No.
ACF
Timeslot SVCE Ch.

Timeslot Ch1
Ch1
G.703
Ch2 Ch3
V.11 G.703
Ch4
V.11
Timeslot Ch2
Timeslot Ch3
Internal Telephone
Timeslot Ch4
External Telephone
Analog levels setting
Loudspeaker
G.703 Co/Contra
64kb/s
ADAPTER1
64kb/s
ADAPTER2
MUX (part of ACF)

RESET
COMMON_SOH_BUS
4 INTF_SOH_BUSES
TO/FROM
SU
DEVELOP
PORT
UNIT POS
ADDRESS
The SVCE Board has the following main functions:
Service Channel
Party line telephone interface
One telephone located on the shelf and one located in max. 1000m distance.
Separate two digits (00...99) call no. for each telephone and collective call by pressing *button.
Loudspeaker output with switch and without volume control is provided. Loudspeaker is
switched off by pushing #-button.
Analog interfaces to connect other service channel equipment.
E/M-wire and Control signal for PABX-Adapter and Loudspeaker will only be transmitted
over the radio hop if timeslot corresponding to SOH-byte E1, E2 or F1 is used.
PABX-Adapter (optional)
Provides connection between the party line and the Public Switched Telephone Network.
Max. eight Adapters can be addressed within a network (call no. #1... #8)
When an incoming call is detected in the adapter, a collective call will be sent to the party line
and the first lifted handset will start the control signal and the line will be connected.
For an outgoing call, dial the adapters no. and wait for the dialling tone.
64kb/s Adapter
Two Adapters each with one channel acc. to ITU-T rec. G.703 (where Co- or Contra-
directional interface can be selected) and one channel acc. to ITU-T rec V.11 with byte
timing.
The channels from each Adapter can be routed to/from five selectable SOH-Buses
(separate routing for Rx and Tx).
ACF (Alarm and Configuration Function)
Collectstemperaturesfromtwosensors,secondaryvoltages,alarmsandinventorydatafrom
the board.
Configure the board by setting telephone and PABX numbers, timeslots, adapt levels for all
analog inp/outp, G.703 co- or contra-interface and selects buses where 64kb/s channels are
to be transmitted.
B4054
51
3.4
52
Supervisory Board
B4054
System Description
NI
TP
LCT
DCC Busses
Supervisory
Function
I2C
RPS
Function
Internal Busses
Regular
SOH
DIR2
Protection
Regular
SOH Interface
Protection
SOH
DIR1
SUPERVISORY BOARD
The Supervisory Board has the following main functions:

System supervision and information collection
Information from other network elements
Alarms from local units
Status from local units
System Control
Radio Protection Switching (RPS)
HW configuration of local units
SW configuration of local units
Communication ports for Network Element Management interface
implementation
Ethernet, Twisted Pair (TP)
RS-485, Network Interface (NI) x 2
RS-232, Local Craft Terminal (LCT) x 2
Element Management over radio, Data Communication Channel
(DCC) x 2
B4054
53
3.5
54
Auxiliary Services Board
B4054
System Description
Alarm Inputs
40 Alarm Inputs
Analogue Inputs
Relay Lines
8 Ch. ADC
8 Relays
Internal Busses
ACF
Alarm and Configuration Function
AUXILIARY SERVICES BOARD
The Auxiliary Services Board has the following main functions:

Alarm and Configuration Function
Customer Interface
40 Alarm Inputs (80 separate lines)
8 Relays (16 separate lines)
8 Analogue Inputs (8 separate lines and 2 GND lines)
B4054
55
3.6
Power Filtering Board
Power Filtering Board Upper
Power Filtering Board Lower

56
B4054
System Description
From the other
filter board(s)
ON/OFF switch
+
Battery
connection
Input alarm
circuit
VDR
NL2000 rack
Filter
Softstart
To the other
filter board(s)
Switch indicator
contacts
Supervisory and
iventory circuits
with I2C-bus
The Power Filtering Board has the following main functions:

Prevent external noise from disturbing the equipment.
Prevent that noise generated by the equipment finds its way to the battery
connections.
Provide immunity against voltage transients.
Support for parallel mounting through blocking diodes.
Perform the (automatic) fuse function for the complete terminal.
Perform the on/off function by a circuit breaker integrated with the
automatic fuse.
Softstart function to limit inrush current.
Support for both positive and negative battery pole grounding.
Relay outputs (available at the connection panel) for circuit breaker
position indication.
Inventory control, temperature monitoring and alarm collection.
B4054
57
3.7
58
Indoor Outdoor Interface Unit
B4054
System Description
IO INTERFACE UNIT
In Door Unit
connector
DC
reject
Out Door Unit

connector
Overvolt.
prot.
AC
reject
Temp
sensor
I2C-bus
connector
data
clk
EEPROM
Power OK
LED (green)
I/O device
Circuit breaker
w/fuse
Battery
connector
The interface transfers the following main signals:

350 MHz IF from the IDU to the ODU.
140 MHz IF from the ODU to the IDU.
A communication signal (MTCOM) between the IDU and the ODU. Signal
transmission in both directions. Frequencies respectively 4.75 MHz (from
IDU to ODU) and 1.9 MHz (ODU to IDU)
Battery voltage feeding to ODU.
All signals between the IDU and the ODU are transmitted on the same cable.
The different signals are led directly to respectively the IDU and the ODU
without separation, with exception for the battery voltage, which is fed
directly from a battery via the IOIU to the ODU.
In addition to signal transmission, the following functions are provided:
Over voltage protection. (Suppression of induced high voltage spikes on
the centre conductor of the coaxial cable connecting the IDU and the
ODU).
Connection for battery voltage, including fuses for both + and - battery
poles.
Power OK indicator (IOIU) to be transferred to modem via an I2C I/Odevice.
I2C EEPROM for storage of inventory control.
I2C Temperature sensor.
Network in order to meet return loss requirements.
Green LED indicating power connected to unit (Power OK indicator, IOIU).
B4054
59
3.8
60
Alarm Display & Relay Board
B4054
Relays
+BAT_COMMON
Drivers
for
LEDs
(green)
(orange)
Warning
(red)
Major/
Minor
(red)
Critical
System Description
Power
On
Drivers
for
Relays
I2C
I/O-A
I2C
I/O-A
I2C
TEMP
I2C
A/D
I2C
EEPROM
LCT
adr=4
PCB
+3.3V
DC/DC
Converter
48 > 3.3V
The Alarm Display & Relay Board has the following main functions:
Connection service port for a LCT.
LEDs for the main alarms Critical and Major/Minor, for the indicator
Warning and for Power On.
Relays and relays outputs (available at the connection panel) for the
main alarms Critical and Major/-Minor, and for the indicator Warning.
Inventory control, temperature monitoring, voltage reading and alarm
collection.
B4054
61
3.9
Optical Interface Baseband Boards
Single Mode
Multi Mode
62
B4054
System Description
2 /1 .5 M b /s
The Optical Interface Baseband Boards have the following main functions:
Main customer traffic interfaces in the InterLink radio-relay system. The
only difference between the -F3, the F4, the F5 and the -F6 versions are
the optical transceivers.
Customer traffic interfaces are 155 Mb/s optical, 2 Mb/s electrical wayside
(2NCS590A-versions) or 1.5 Mb/s electrical wayside (2NCS590C-versions).
155 Mb/s customer fibre cables are inserted directly into the optical
transceiver on the front of the board, while the 2 Mb/s or the 1.5 Mb/s
wayside interface is located on the connection panel.
2NCS590A-F3 and 2NCS590C-F3 have a 155 Mb/s optical transceiver for
single mode fibre and are designed for a target distance of 15 km. The F3 versions are complient with the IYU-T G.957 and G.958 recommendations. Application code: L-1.1 (SDH) and OC-3, IR-1 (SONET).
2NCS590A-F4 and 2NCS590C-F4 have a 155 Mb/s optical transceiver for
multi mode fibre and are designed for a target distance of 2 km. The -F4
versions are compliant with the ANSI recommendations T1.105.06 and
T1.646. Application code: OC-3, SR-0 (SONET).
B4054
63
2NCS590C-F5 has a 155 Mb/s optical transceiver for single mode fibre and
is designed for a target distance of 40 km. The -F5 version is complient
with the ITU-T G.957 and G.958 recommendations. Application code: L1.1 (SDH) and OC-3, LR-1 (SONET).
2NCS590C-F6 has a 155 Mb/s optical transceiver for single mode fibre and
is designed for a target distance of 80 km. The -F6 version is complient
with the ITU-T G.957 and G.958 recommendations. Application code: L1.2 (SDH) and OC-3, LR-2 (SONET).
DCC channels in the frame overhead may be extracted/inserted on the
OIBB via the supervisory board. The DCC-data rates are 64kb/s,
192kb/s or 576kb/s.
64kb/s traffic may be inserted/extracted in the 155Mb/s frame overhead
via the service board. Up to four 64kb/s may be inserted/extracted on each
service board. The SOH bus carries the 64kb/s traffic between the service
board and the OIBB.
Alarm and Control Function (ACF) is a local part of the InterLink
supervisory system. The ACF provides control, configuration and status
information collection of the OIBB.
64
B4054
System Description
3.10
B4054
Interface Baseband Board, 3 x DS3/E3
65
Customer connection
Block schematic of InterLink STM-1

Interface Baseband Board with
3*DS3/E3 and DS1/E1Wayside
STM-1
DC/DC
Converter
48 V
+1,5 V
+3,3 V
+5,0 V
Transceiver
STM-1
LT
TDM 1
LR
DXC
TDM 2
DS3/E3 #1
RT
PLD15
3 * DS3/E3
Line Interface
Unit (LIU)
PB_XS_1
Wayside
DS1
DS1 / E1
Line Interface
Unit (LIU)
PERSISTENT
MEMORY
SOH_BUS
I 2C-Bus
P
MPC850
TEMP
SENSOR
EEPROM
ACF
CPLD
2 MHz Sync
ADC
Development port
40
2x
DCC 3:5
FPGA
E1
DS1/E1
PB_RD_1
RB_X_1
2M Sync
DS3/E3 #2
DS3/E3 #3
RB_R_1
Align
&
Switch
SOH bus
Customer connection
RR
MODEM
SORP
DCC#3-DCC#5
RPS_Bus
SU_Bus
The main purpose for this Board is to execute processing of baseband signals
between the Customer interface and the Modem. The board supports the
following customer interfaces:
155 Mb/s / STM-1 / OC3 electrical interface
3 x 45 Mb/s / DS3 electrical interfaces or 3 x 34 Mb/s / E3 electrical interfaces
(selectable)
1 x 2 Mb/s E1 electrical interface or 1 x 1,5 Mb/s DS1 electrical interface for
wayside traffic (selectable)
4 serial channels can be extracted/inserted. 2 channels are dedicated to radio
and line. The other 2 can carry traffic from either the radio or line side
individually. Possible data rates are:
DCCR, 192 kb/s, bits D1-D3 in RSOH
DCCM, 576 kb/s, bits D4-D12 in MSOH
64 kb/s channel, select byte in SOH
The SORP ASIC can extract/insert 64 kb/s channels in SOH. The interface
against SORP ASIC consists of two 2 Mb/s timeslot-buses, one for extracting
and one for inserting channels in Radio- and Line- directions. Between
Service Board and Interface Baseband Boards, four timeslot buses are routed
in the Connection Panel.
66
B4054
System Description
3.11
B4054
Transceiver
67
XMTR Module
350 MHz
Tx IF
350 MHz
Rx IF
140 MHz
AGC & Cable

equalizer
SSB
Upconverter
Predistortion &
AGC
Multiplexer
RF out
Power
Amplifier
LO mxr
IF loop
MTcom
Synthesizer Unit
140 MHz
IFSynt.
MTCom.
TxSynt.
RxSynt.
CTRL
350
MHz
Tx LO
LO
Det.
Rx LO
210 MHz
48V
DC/DC
FLTR &
AGC
IF&CTRL Bd.
140 MHz
DSB
Mixer
FLTR &
AGC
350
MHz
IMR
Mixer
Low Noise
Amplifier
RF in
RCVR Module
The outdoor mounted mounted transceiver unit contains 7 modules/sub-units; a

microwave transmitter module, a microwave receiver module, 3 local oscillators,
an IF & controller board and a detector board. In transceivers for space diversity
systems, the detector board is replaced by a space diversity combiner board and an
additional delay board. The transceiver is connected to the modem with a single
coaxial cable that carries Tx-IF, Rx-IF and signalling (MTCom). Power is supplied
through a separate connector.
The transceiver utilises a single conversion scheme in the transmitter and a dual
conversion in the receiver. In order to obtain an optimum spectrum mask, the
transmitter chain contains predistortion circuitry at IF before the microwave
upconverter and power amplifier. Narrow channel filters in the branching unit
further reduces the spectrum mask. The second converter in the receive chain
allows for an IF loop-back facility for diagnostics purposes. LO frequencies for
the microwave frequency converters are generated in synthesised DROs. The
oscillators are by nature fixed in frequency, i.e. they can only be remotely
programmed within a narrow range. When necessary, the oscillators can be
mechanically adjusted within a range of approx. 200 MHz. Power supply, transmit/
receive IF-chain and controller (MPC/DSP) for the transceiver are integrated on
the IF & controller board.
The space diversity transceiver contains a dual microwave receiver (one for each
antenna), and combination circuitry at IF. It can either combine the two received
signals, or select between them.
The branching unit contains narrow RF channel filters and circulators.
68
B4054
Installation
SECTION II
Installation
B4029
69

70
B4029
Installation
1.0
Basic Planning
1 - BASIC PLANNING
1.1 Installation Material
1.2 Installation Tools
1.3 Outline Dimensions
D3
Main Antenna
D1
Flex-Twist WG
Main Port
2 - PACKING & HANDLING

2.1 Packing
2.2 Transportation
2.3 Handling
2.4 Inspection
Radio Transmission Connections
3 - INSTALLATION
3.1 Rack Installation
3.2 Power & Grounding
3.3 Waveguide Installation
3.4 Signal Cabling
D3
Sp.Div. Antenna
D2
Elliptical WG
Space Diversity Port
D
InterLink
ODU
A4 - Mount 3 m antenna
Rack & Power

Connections
B8- IDU to ODU Coax Cable
InterLink
IDU
A1 - Equipment Rack
Traffic & Network

Connections
B1- Electrical Interface STM-1
C
B2 - Wayside Interface
A2 - Rack Mounting
Accessories
B3 - Optical Interface STM-1
A3 - DC Cables and
Grounding
C1 - Basic Service Kit
B4 -Terminal to Terminal
C2 - Extnd Service Kit
B5 - Serv.ch / Alarm / NI
C3 - Extension Board
B6 - LCT / LAN Interface
B7 - Electrical Interface 3xDS3/E3
Fig 1-1
B4029
Basic Planning
71
1.1
Installation Material
A. Rack & Power Connections

Item
A1
A2-1
A2-2
A3-1
A3-2
A3-3
A4
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
Note 4
Note 5
Note 6
72
RACK SUPPORT & DC CABLING & GROUNDING - Common for all NL2000
Information
Code
ETSI, Height 2200
ABW131-220
ETSI, Height 2100
ABW131-210
ETSI, Height 1700
ABW131-170
19, Height 2200
ABW131-220_19
Screw Kit with Brackets
Rack installation, top support and fixing to floor
MSK5371
Support Bar
Rack top support / frame L= 225 cm
MJK46
DC Cable & Grounding
DC power cable to Nera main rack, terminal block and
AWZP35
Kit (from 10A fuses)
Auxiliary power sub-rack. Grounding cable from rack to
external earth-bus cable.
Power Cable,10A fuse
DC power cable to equipment sub-rack (max 2 XCVR)
UWMK5051
Power Cable, 16A fuse
DC power cable to equipment sub-rack (max 4 XCVR)
87W5116-1500
ODU antenna mount
ODU mounted on 3.0 m or 3.7 m antenna structure
ABZ5798
Description
Equipment Rack
QTY
1
Reference
Note 1
1
x
x
Note 2
Note 3
Note 4
(2)
(2)
x
Note 5
Note 6
The rack is assembled with pre-mounted sub-racks and waveguide according to the actual system configuration.
Optional ETSI rack for ancillary equipment is flat-packed and includes assembling instructions. ABW131-xx0-K.
Contains material for mounting 1 rack to floor and fixing rack top to wall or support frame. Includes 12 front panel screws.
Qty 1= Along wall. Qty 2 = Spaced from wall by frame of support bars. Screws and brackets included in item A2-1.
Kit contents: a) 25 m DC cable. Max. 2 m each cable (12) for fully equipped rack. Assuming DC supply from adjacent rack.
b) 6 m grounding cable & terminals.
Qty kit K depends on system: Qty of transceivers T, directions D and cable-distance L from DC distribution.
Calculation formula: K = (T+2)*L*D / 25. (Individual supply to each transceiver and dual supply to BB)
Example system 3+1, two directions, L= 2 m: K=(4+2)*2*2 /25 = 0.96 -->1 kit.
Example system 1+1, two directions, L= 6 m: K=(2+2)*6*2 /25 = 1.92 -->2 kits.
Used only for small systems when Nera equipment rack is not provided. Cable (15 m) has pre-attached power connector in
one end. Grounding cable (min. 2 m), 10 mm2, (85W37-10E04) and ground terminal (87K94-50B) to be provided.
Used only for systems when Nera rack and power sub-rack is not provided. Cable (15 m) has pre-attached power connector
in one end. Grounding cable (min. 2 m), 10 mm2, (85W37-10E04) and ground terminal (87K94-50B) to be provided.
B4029
Installation
B. Traffic & Network Connections
Item
B1
Description
Coax Cable, 75 Ohms
B2
Wayside Interface
1
2
3
Pair Cable, 120 Ohms

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B5
15 Pairs, 5 m
15 Pairs, 15 m
15 Pairs, 25 m
4 Pairs, 10 m
/ &7
/ $ 1 ,QW
HUIDFH
%
1
2
3
4
5
6
(2)
5 m length. Pre-attached connector, at radio side

87W5113-500
87W5113-1500
87W5113-2500
(1)
2 cables per traffic-channel, L=4m

1 duplex cable per traffic channel, L=5m
1 duplex cable per traffic channel, L=5m
Wayside traffic between 2 terminals, L=4m
Service telephone between 2 terminals, L=4m
64kb/s channels between 2 terminals, L=4m
Network Interface between 2 terminals, L=4m
1 HW
Z RUN ,QW
HUIDFH
For the following connections: (Select length)
One 64Kb/s channel
Service Telephone to other equipment
EOW, PABX
For the following connections: (Select length)
Two 64Kb/s channels
External Alarms
Analogue inputs
Network Interface
LCT Cable Assembly, 3m

LAN Cable Assembly, 10m
Connectors D-sub 9pins female

Standard Ethernet cable w/ RJ45-8pin connectors
( OHFW
ULFDO,QW
HUIDFH [ ' 6
Coax Cable, 75 Ohms
Connector tupe BNC attached in one end
87W5104-LC10
87W5104-FC10
87W5104-SC10
(1)
87W5105-MTRJ10
87W5105-FC10
87W5105-SC10
87W5105-ST10
(1)
UWMH5615-400
87W5104-LC05
87W5105-MTRJ05
87W5115-400
87W5115-400
87W5115-400
UWMK5614-400
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
$ ODUP V
87W5113-500
87W5113-1500
87W5113-2500
(x)
87W5107-500
87W5107-1500
87W5107-2500
UWMK3078
(x)
87W53-1A
(x)
(x)
(x)
(6 per
traffic
channel)
,' 8 W
R 2 ' 8 &RD[ &DEOH
Cable Kit 100 m LCF14-50
N-Connector Kit
Preparation Tool for LCF14
For cable run 200 300 m:
Cable & Connector Kit
300 m LCF38-50
Extra Connector Kit
Preparation Tool for LCF38
B4029
UWMH3080
Pair Cable Connections to IDF ( Service Channels
Cable,
Cable,
Cable,
Cable,
Reference
Through connections - Terminal to Terminal

Coax Cable, 155 Mb/s
Fibre Patch Cord, SM
Fibre Patch Cord, MM
Pair Cable, Wayside
Pair Cable, SVCE
Pair Cable, 64kb/s
Pair Cable, NI
1
2
Connector type 1.0/2.3 attached in one end, 10 m

2 cables per traffic-channel
Single Modus SM (ITU-T Rec.). 1 duplex cable per traffic channel

Fibre Patch Cord
SM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors LC to LC
Fibre Patch Cord
SM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors LC to FC
Fibre Patch Cord
SM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors LC to SC
Multi Modus MM (ANSI Rec.). 1 duplex cable per traffic channel
Fibre Patch Cord
MM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors MT-RJ to MT-RJ
Fibre Patch Cord
MM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors MT-RJ to FC
Fibre Patch Cord
MM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors MT-RJ to SC
Fibre Patch Cord
MM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors MT-RJ to ST
Cable, 5 Pairs, 5 m
Cable, 5 Pairs, 15 m
Cable, 5 Pairs, 25 m
QTY
Optical Interface
DOO1 /
Code
Electrical Interface, STM-1
B3
INTERCONNECTIONS CABLING (Common parts

Information
100 m Coax Cable including 200 Cable Ties

Connectors for IDU & ODU and Cable Grounding
Easy cable preparation for connector attachment
85W5147-100
85W5147-150
85W5147-200
87K5148-N
85W5147-TL
300 m 3/8 Coax Cable including 600 Cable Ties

and Connectors for ODU & IDU including jumper
cable and Cable Grounding Kit
Connectors for ODU & IDU including jumper cable
and Cable Grounding Kit
Easy cable preparation for connector attachment
85W5011-K300
87K5013-1A
85W5011-TL
73
C. Accessories
SERVICE KITS
Item
Description
Information
C1
Basic Service Kit
C2
Extended Service Kit
C3
Extension Board
For operation and simple maintenance of InterLink.

The kit contains anti-static wrist strap, basic tools
and fuses. Minimum one kit per site.
For commissioning and maintenance. The kit
contains special test cables, connector adapters,
fuses and special tools. (2 per system section)
For advanced service only (maintenance centre).
Code
QTY
AZB139-BASIC
AZB139-EXTND
(x)
UWF29
(x)
Reference
D. Radio Transmission Connections

Item
D1
D2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.2
Description
Information & Code

NL2006
NL2007
A/B/C
A/B/D/E
ODU main port:

Flex-Twist WG & Screw Kit
ODU space diversity port:
Elliptical WG
Termination PDR, Antenna
Termination PDR, ODU
Flange adapter ODU side
Hanger kit of 10
Cleat & Screw Kit of 10
Earthing Kit
Bend 90H
Flange Screw Kit
Flange Screw kit with shim cupal
QTY
NL2007C
UK
NL2008
A/B/C
NL2011
A/B
ABZ5989
ABZ5796
ABZ5796
ABZ5796
ABZ5990
X10011
X10027
X10027
X10015
X10029
X10030
X10015
X10031
X10031
X10017
X10032
X10032
X100329
X100360
X10061
AWB36
AWR6
AWR41
X100335
X100360
X10063
AWB44
AWR7
AWR45
X10015
X10029
X10029
ABZ5822
X100335
X100360
X10063
AWB44
AWR7
AWR45
X100335
X100360
X10063
AWB44
AWR7
AWR45
X100338
X100360
X10064
AWB132
AWR8
AWR6001
Reference
(x)m
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Installation Tools
Mounting of rack
Hammer drill
Masonry bit, 12 mm
Hammer, small
Square and Spirit Level
Tape Measure and Pencil
Hacksaw and File (If cutting of support bar is required. Standard length is
225 mm)
Spanner 17 mm (Qty 2)
Adjustable spanner 0-20 mm
74
B4029
Installation
1.3
Outline Dimensions
1.3.1
Rack dimensions, ETSI
1.3.1.1
2200 mm
89
Aux Subrack
240
89
Aux Subrack
240
IOIU Shelf
390
Subrack A
890
Subrack A
2200
Subrack B
WIDTH = 600, DEPTH = 300
Fig 1-2
B4029
ETSI Rack, 2200mm

75
1.3.1.2
2100 mm
89
89
Aux Subrack
240
Aux Subrack
240
IOIU Shelf
390
Subrack A
890
Subrack A
2100
Subrack B
Fig 1-3
76
ETSI Rack, 2100mm
B4029
Installation
1.3.1.3
1700 mm
89
89
Aux Subrack
240
Aux Subrack
240
IOIU Shelf
390
Subrack A
890
Subrack A
1700
Subrack B
Fig 1-4
B4029
ETSI Rack, 1700mm
77
1.3.2
Rack dimensions, 19"
89
89
Aux Subrack
250
Aux Subrack
250
IOIU Shelf
400
Subrack A
915
Subrack A
2200
Subrack B
Fig 1-5
78
19" Rack, 2200mm

B4029
Installation
600
250
50
Adapter Plate
465 (19")
Front Panel Mounting 515 (ETSI)
Fig 1-6
Rack, Top view
1.3.3
Waveguide flange dimensions
Radio
NL2006
NL2007
NL2008
NL2011
Flange
PDR70
PDR84
PDR84
PDR100
301
201
111
Fig 1-7
B4029
ODU Box
46
46
79
2.0
2.1
Transportation & Handling

Packing
The equipment rack is packed in sealed plastic bags and moisture absorbing
bags are inserted. Any separate sensitive product, i.e. printed boards, are
packed in anti-static handling bags. All equipment is further packed in special
designed cases.
Marking is done according to standard practice unless other are specified by
customers:
Customers address.
Contract No.
Site name (if known).
Case No.
Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the Packing Specification
issued for the respective shipment.
2.2
Transportation
The equipment cases are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway and sea,
suitable for handling by forklift trucks and slings. The cargo must be kept dry
during transport and storage.
For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-owned
cargo containers should be used.
It is recommended that all equipment should be transported to the installation
site in its original packing cases.
If any intermediate storing is required, all cases must be stored under dry and
cool conditions and out of direct sunlight.
2.3
Handling
It is essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the equipment and
handling printed circuit boards, special precautions should be taken to avoid

ESD (Electrostatic Static Discharge). Generally, units with static discharge
protection should not be unpacked until the installation takes place.
Ensure you are properly grounded at a controlled ESD point before and
during unpacking and handling of any sensitive component.
2.4
Inspection
Check the packing lists and ensure that correct parts numbers quantities of
goods have arrived.
Inspect for any damage on the cases and equipment. Report any damage or
discrepancy to Nera Networks AS by mail or fax.
80
B4029
Installation
3.0
3.1
Equipment Rack Installation

General
The rack can be fixed to the floor by 4 bolts and anchoring plugs. Alignment
is done by the adjustable feet.
Rack top can be fixed to the wall by two support brackets, bolts and
anchoring plugs.
Use of support bars enable installation away from wall.
The following material are required:
Qty 1 Screw & Bracket Kit
Qty 1 Support Bar .......
MSK5371
MJK46
Tools required: See List of Tools in Installation Planning
3.2
Procedure
Securing to floor
1.Place the rack upright, without the adjustable feet, and position it
according to a layout plan.
2.Put marks through the holes, remove the rack and drill holes in the floor.
3.Put expansion plugs in the holes and hammer gently into place.
4.Mount the adjustable feet (nominal height 28 mm) and place the rack
into position.
5.Insert the screws and washers and align the rack to correct vertical
position by adjusting the feet. Then tighten the screws.
Support of rack top
1.Mount the two support brackets on top of the rack.
2.The rack may be installed directly to the wall. A support bar on wall may
be used to place the rack away from any skirting board and enables
installation of other racks in a row. The position of support brackets is
adjustable.
3.If the rack is installed away from wall, extended support is needed. Use
the support bar and brackets to make a frame which can be secured to the
wall.
4.Back-to-back installation may either be done by bracket to bracket
mounting or by use of support bar to enable installation of other racks
in a row and securing to wall.
B4029
81
Support Bar can be made to frame by cutting to required length
and connected by support brackets
449 mm
Support Bar MJK46 (L= 225)
Support Bracket MBB708
Rack Top
75.5
449
75.5
26.5
30
A = Positions of adjustable feet (405 x 209)

F = Positions of anchoring bolts(measures)
143.5
F
Rack Bottom
Fig 3-1
82
Securing of Rack (Top view)

B4029
Installation
Support Bar MJK46
Part of ScrewKit MSK5371
Wall
2227
Support Bracket MBB708

(Part of screwkit)
Rack Side View
Adjustable feet
Part of ScrewKit MSK5371
Note:
The indicated support bar distance from the floor is relevant for a 2200mm rack.
For other rack hights the distance from the floor will be "Rack hight + 27mm"
Fig 3-2
Securing of Rack (Side view)
B4029
83
3.3
Power & Grounding
3.3.1
Rack Top Connections
External Earth
min 10mm2
4mm2
Fig 3-3
84
Subrack A 6mm
Subrack B 6mm
AUX Subrack 6mm
Subrack A PWR1
+ -
Subrack B PWR2
+ -
Subrack B PWR1
+ -
External Power cables from

DC Distribution Fuses (10A)
Subrack A PWR2
+ -
Rack top power connections

B4029
Installation
3.3.2
AUX Subrack Power Connections

For induvidual power to transceivers in ODU.
External Power
cables from
DC Distribution
Sub-Rack A
Indoor Outdoor
Interface Unit
B
Sub-Rack B
Fuses (10A)
A
Indoor Outdoor
Interface Unit
B
Max. 2.5mm2
Fig 3-4
B4029
AUX subrack power connections

85
3.3.3
Internal Power Distribution
3.3.3.1
2+1 Terminals
Common (Dual) Power Supply to BB (IDU) and Transceivers (ODU).
10
INT F CA
INT F CA
INT F C A
INT F C A
INT F CA
INT F C A
INT FC A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
ON
POWER
ON
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OFF
48VDC
PWR
OFF
48VDC
INDO O RO UTDOO R INTERFACE UNIT
POWER
PWR
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
O U T PU T
O U T PU T
O U T PU T
O U T P UT
O U T PU T
O U T P UT
OU T P U T
INTF C C
INT FC C
INT FC C
INT FC C
IN TFC C
IN TFC C
INTFC C
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
O U TP U T
IDU
INPUT
O U TP U T
INPUT
O U T PU T
INPUT
O U T PU T
O U T PU T
O U T PU T
OU T P U T
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
POWER
ON
OUT
Subrack A
PWR
ON
OFF
R MV
RST
RM V
RST
R MV
RST
MO DEM BD
IN
OFF
48VDC
INDO OR O UTDO O RINTERFACE UNIT
PWR
ODU
R MV
R ST
R MV
RST
R MV
RST
R MV
RST
IDU
SUPERVISORY BD
MODEM BD
ODU
SVCE BD
MODEM BD
INVENTORY
CONTROL
PWR
ON
OFF

TB2
TB3
S1
J2 (SU TEST)
J1 (EXT CON)
IC1
ON
GND
10
+ -
GND
GND
+ - GND +
INT FC A
INT F CA
INT FC A
INT F CA
INT FC A
INT F CA
INT F C A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
ON
ON
IN
IN
IDU
POWER
OUT
OUT
OFF
48VDC
PWR
OFF
48VDC
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
POWER
ON
OUT
2
D
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
O UT P U T
O UT P U T
O UT P U T
O UT P U T
O UT P U T
O U TP U T
O U T P UT
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTF C C
INTF C C
IN TFC C
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OU T P U T
OU T P U T
OU T P U T
O UT P U T
OU T P U T
O U TP U T
O U T P UT
ODU
PWR
ON
Subrack B
OFF
RM V
R ST
R MV
RST
RM V
RST
MODE M BD
MODEM BD
R MV
RST
SUPERVISORY BD
R MV
RS T
SVCE BD
RM V
RST
RM V
RST
IN
OFF
48VDC
PWR
INDO O R OUTDO OR INTERFACEUNIT
POWER
INDO O R OUTDO OR INTERFACEUNIT
PWR
IDU
ODU
MOD EM BD
INVENTORY
CONTROL
PWR
ON
OFF
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVERPOWER
POWERCONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
TB2
TB2
TB3
TB3
S1
S1
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
IC1
ON
- GND + -
Fig 3-5
86
GND
- GND + -
GND
Internal power distribution, 2+1 Terminal

B4029
Installation
3.3.3.2
2+1 Terminals with AUX Subrack

Dual Power Supply to BB. Individual Power Supply to each Transceiver in
the ODU.
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
OFF
OFF
Aux Subrack
PWR
ON
OFF
10
INT FC A
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
8
INT FC A
7
INT FC A
6
INT FC A
5
INT FC A
4
INTF C A
INT F C A
ON
POWER
ON
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OFF
48VDC
OFF
48VDC
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
INPUT
OU T P U T
OU T P U T
OUT P UT
OU T P U T
O UT P U T
I NTFC C
INTFC C
I NTFC C
INTFC C
INTF C C
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OU T P U T
OU T P U T
OU T P U T
INPUT
INPUT
OUT
OUT P UT
OUT P UT
R MV
RST
RM V
R ST
R MV
RS T
R MV
RST
O UT P U T
Subrack A
PWR
ON
OFF
R MV
RST
R MV
RST
SVCE BD
R MV
RST
SUPERVISORY BD
IN
OUT P UT
M ODEM BD
ON
OFF
INTFC B
INPUT
O UT P U T
INTFC C
INPUT
POWER
48VDC
INTFC B
INPUT
ODU
PWR
INTFC B
INPUT
O UT P U T
MOD EM BD
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
INTFC B
INPUT
INTFC C
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
3
2
IDU
PWR
INDO O RO UTDO O R INTERFACE UNIT
POWER
PWR
Aux Subrack
IDU
MODEM BD
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
PWR
ON
OFF
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVERPOWER
POWERCONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
TB2
TB3
TB2
S1
J1
J1(EXT
(EXTCON)
CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
IC1
ON
- GND + -
10
GND
- GND + - GND +
INTF C A
INTF C A
INT F C A
INTF C A
INT F C A
IN T F C A
INTF C A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
ON
ON
IN
IN
OFF
48VDC
POWER
ON
OUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
O U T P UT
O U T P UT
O U T P UT
O U T PU T
OU T P U T
IN TFC C
IN TFC C
IN TFC C
IN TFC C
INT FC C
IN TFC C
INTFC C
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
O U T P UT
OU T P U T
O U T P UT
O U T PU T
O U T P UT
O U T PU T
O U T PU T
R MV
RS T
R MV
RST
RM V
RST
O U T P UT
ODU
PWR
ON
OFF
R MV
RST
R MV
RST
R MV
RST
SVCE BD
R MV
RS T
SUPERVISORY BD
IN
OFF
48VDC
PWR
2
D
MO DEM B D
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
O U T P UT
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
IDU
POWER
OUT
OUT
OFF
48VDC
PWR
INDOO R O UTDO O RINTERFACEUNIT
POWER
INDOO R O UTDO O RINTERFACEUNIT
PWR
Subrack B
IDU
MODE M BD
ODU
M ODEM B D
INVENTORY
CONTROL
PWR
ON
OFF

TB2
TB3
S1
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
IC1
ON
- GND + -
Fig 3-6
B4029
GND
GND
+ - GND +
Internal power distribution, 2+1 Terminal w/AUX Subrack

87
3.3.3.3
3+1 Terminals
Common (Dual) Power Supply to BB (IDU) and Transceivers (ODU).
PW R
ON
ON
16
15
14
PW R
ON
12
11
OFF
IDU
IN VENTOR Y
C ON TR OL
ODU
13
POW ER
48VD C
IDU
IN VENTOR Y
C ON TR OL
ODU
17
OFF
IN
18
POWER
48VD C
OUT
19
PW R
IN
IN
IN
20
OFF
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN VENTOR Y
C ON TR OL
21
POWER
48VD C
IDU
INDO OR OUTDO O R INTE RFA CE U NIT
ON
OFF
POWER
48VD C
IN DOO R OUTDO OR INTE RFA CE U NIT
PW R
IDU
10
I VEN TOR Y
N
C ON TR OL
ODU
ODU
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFCA
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFCA
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFCA
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFCA
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFC B
2
D
IN
P UT
I NP U T
I NP UT
OUTP U T
OU TP UT
OU TPU T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
IN
P UT
OUTP U T
I NP U T
OU TP UT
INP U T
OU TP U T
INTFC C
I NP U T
OU TP UT
INTFC C
I NP UT
INP U T
I NP U T
OU TPU T
OUTP U T
OU TP UT
I NPU T
OUTP U T
INTFC C
I NP U T
I NP U T
I NP U T
OU TP U T
OU TP UT
I NPU T
OUTP U T
OU TP U T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
I NPU T
I NP U T
OUTP U T
OU TP U T
I NP UT
OU TPU T
INTFC C
INP U T
I NP U T
OUTP U T
OU TP UT
INTFC C
INTFC C
I NP U T
I NPU T
I NP U T
I NP UT
INP U T
I NP U T
OU TP UT
OUTP U T
OU TP U T
OU TPU T
OUTP U T
OU TP UT
I NP UT
I NP U T
OU T
P UT
I NP UT
OU TP U T
INTFC C
I NPU T
OU TPU T
INTFC C
INTFC C
I NP UT
I NP U T
I NP U T
OU T
P UT
OU TP U T
OU TPU T
I NP U T
OUTP U T
OU TP U T
INTFC C
INTFC C
I NPU T
I NP U T
OUTP U T
OU TP U T
RMV
RS T
R MV
RS T
P WR
ON
OF F
R MV
RS T
R MV
RS T
RMV
RS T
R MV
RS T
R MV
R ST
R MV
RS T
R MV
RS T
Subrack A
R MV
R ST
SUP ERVI SOR Y BD
SVC E BD
AUX ILIA R YS ERVI CE B D
INTE RFACE BASEBAN D B D
MOD EM B D
INTE RFACE BASEBAN D B D
MOD EM B D
MOD EM B D
MOD EM B D
IN TE RFAC E BASEBAN D B D
P WR
ON
OF F
TRANSCEIVER POWER C ONNECTIONS

TB2
TB3
S1
IC1
Fig 3-7
88
GND
GND
+ -
GND
J2 (SU TEST)
ON
1
- GND + -
J1 (EXT CON)
Internal power distribution, 3+1 Terminal

B4029
Installation
3.3.3.4
3+1 Terminals with AUX Subrack

Dual Power Supply to BB. Individual Power Supply to each Transceiver in
the ODU.
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
17
15
14
PWR
ON
12
11
OFF
ID U
INVEN TOR Y
CON TROL
ODU
13
POW ER
48VD C
ID U
INVEN TOR Y
CON TROL
ODU
16
OFF
48VD C
IN
18
POW ER
IN
19
PWR
OUT
IN
IN
20
OFF
OUT
OUT
OUT
INVEN TOR Y
C ON TROL
21
POW ER
48VDC
ID U
INDO OR O UTD OO R INTERFACE UNIT
PWR
IDU
ON
OFF
POW ER
48VD C
INDO OR OUTDO O R INTERFACE U NIT
PW R
Aux Subrack
Aux Subrack
PWR
ON
10
IN VEN TOR Y
CO
N TR OL
ODU
ODU
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFCA
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFCA
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFCA
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFCB
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFCB
3
2
I NP UT
IN
P UT
I NP U T
I NP UT
OU TPU T
OUTP U T
OU TP UT
OU TPU T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
I NP U T
I NP UT
OU TP UT
OU TPU T
IN
P UT
OU TP U T
INTFC C
IN
P UT
OU TP U T
I NP U T
OU TP UT
INTFC C
I NP U T
OU TP UT
I NP UT
OU T
P UT
INTFC C
I NP UT
OU T
P UT
INP U T
I NP U T
I NPU T
OU TP U T
OU TP UT
OU T
P UT
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INP U T
OU TP U T
I NP U T
OU TP UT
I NPU T
OU T
P UT
INP U T
OU TP U T
INTFC C
I NPU T
I NP U T
I NP U T
OUTP U T
OU TP UT
INTFC C
INTFC C
I NP U T
I NPU T
I NP U T
I NP UT
OU TP U T
OU TPU T
OUTP U T
OU TP U T
OU TPU T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INP U T
I NP U T
I NPU T
I NP U T
OU TP U T
OU TP UT
OUTP U T
OU TP U T
I NP U T
I NPU T
I NP U T
OU TPU T
OUTP U T
OU TP U T
OU TPU T
R MV
RS T
R MV
R ST
SV CE B D
IN
P UT
OUTP U T
AU XILIAR Y SER VI C EB D
I NP UT
OU TPU T
I NP U T
P WR
ON
OF F
R MV
R ST
R MV
RS T
R MV
RS T
RMV
RS T
R MV
RS T
R MV
R ST
RMV
RS T
Subrack A
RMV
RS T
SU PER VI SORY BD
MODEM B D
IN TERF AC E BA SEB AN D BD
IN TERF AC E BA SEB AND BD
MODEM B D
MODEM B D
IN TERF AC E BA SEB AND BD
MODEM B D
P WR
ON
OF F
TRAN SCE IVER POWER C ON NEC TIONS

TB2
TB3
IC 1
S1
J1 (EXT C ON)
J2 (SU TEST)
ON
1 2
Fig 3-8
B4029
GND
+ -
GND
- GND +
- GND +
Internal power distribution, 3+1 Terminal w/AUX Subrack

89
4.0
ODU Installation
4.1
Mounting to Column
Transceiver
Interface
Note! Keep
cover on until
the Transceiver is to be
attached
Column
75 or
115mm
Column Clamp
Waveguide
Flange
Main
AGC Connector
(Not used in
1+0 system)
Washer M10
Nut M10 (x2)

IDU - ODU Cable
Connector,
N-50 ohm
Ground Connection
Attach grounding cable
(10mm2) to this point
with the M6 Nut and
Washers
Fig 4-1
90
IDU - ODU Cable

Connector, N-50 ohm
(Not used in 1+0 system)
AGC Connector
Branching Unit
B4029
Installation
4.2
Transceiver attachment
Hook the top Transceiver hinges

to the Branching Unit and slide the
Transceiver connector flange, to
mate with the corresponding
Branching Unit flange
Secure the Transceiver

to the Branching unit with
the four attached screws
Remove cover.
Ensure that the rubber
gasket is attached to
the flange
Note!
Do not remove or attach the Transceiver with DC power on.
Fig 4-2
B4029
Transceiver attachment
91
4.3
ODU mounting on 2m and 2.4m antennas
ODU Mounting Kit

Pos no.1 Bracket MBB6329
Pos no 2 Clamp 97B28D-821
Pos no 3 Washer Flat 97W26B-D0
Pos no 4 Nut Hexagon 97N6P-D0
Pos no 5 Clamp 97B28C-80
Pos no 6 Column MJC6328
4
3
2
1
5
3
Fig 4-3
92
2m and 2.4m antenna attachment
B4029
Installation
4.4
ODU mounting on 3m and 3.7m antennas
ODU Mounting Kit

Pos no.1
Pos no 2
Pos no 3
Pos no 4
Pos no 5
Bracket MBB6332
Clamp 120mm MBC6108
Washer Flat 97W26B-D0
Nut Hexagon 97N6P-D0
Screw Mashine Hexagon 97S10F-D060
5
3
4
2
Fig 4-4
B4029
3m and 3.7m antenna attachment
93
5.0
5.1
Waveguide Installation
Waveguide
Shim Copper/
Aluminium
Copper side
Alu side
Flange Adapter
(NL2007 only)
Fig 5-1
94
Waveguide to antenna
B4029
Installation
Copper side
Fig 5-2
B4029
Shim Copper/
Aluminium
Alu side
Waveguide to radio
95
6.0
IDU/ODU Cable Installation

Both ends of the cable must be terminated with N-male connectors. Cables
with outer conductor of solid corrugated copper are recommended.
For other cable types, the cable and all necessary installation materials must
be arranged by the purchaser.
Cable length limitations are dependent upon cable type used. Cable examples
are shown in paragraph 1.1 in this section. Cable lenghts include cable ties.
Avoid excessive bending. Run the cable where it is reasonable well

protected and will not rub against sharp edges or overly abrasive
surfaces.
The N-connectors should be tightened to the IDU and ODU according
to the manufacturers installation instructions (provided with the
connectors).
The cable connection to the ODU should be made weatherproof
using the cable connector weatherproof sleeve provided in the
installation kit. See Figure 6-2.
See Figure 6-1 for Coax Cable Arrangement for FSJ1-50 cable type.
96
B4029
Installation
Antenna
Power and Earth

Connections
2a
PWR
PWR
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Aux Subrack
2b
10
I NTFCA
I NTFCA
IN TFCA
INT FCA
INT FCA
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFCB
I NTFCB
I NTFCB
INT FCB
IN TFCB
ON
O DU
POWER
ON
IN
IN
I NV ENTO RY
CONTROL
PWR
OUT
OUT
O FF
O FF
48VDC
I DU
I NVEN TO RY
CONTROL
I NDOOR OUT DOOR I NT E RF ACE UNI T
POWER
48VDC
I NDOOR OUT DOOR I NT E RF ACE UNI T
PWR
I DU
3a
2
D
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INTFC C
OUTPUT
INTFCC
INPUT
OUTPUT
INTFCC
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
I NTFCC
INPUT
OUTPUT
I NTFCC
OUTPUT
INT FCC
INPUT
OUTPUT
INT FCC
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ODU
PWR
ON
OFF
MV
R
RS
T
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RM
V
RST
MV
R
RST
SUPERVISORY BD
INT ERF ACE BASEBAND BD
MODEM BD
INT ERF ACE BASEBAND BD
MODEM BD
SVCE BD
RMV
RST
PWR
ON
OFF

TB2
TB3
S1
I C1
GND
+ -
GND
- GND + -
GND
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
ON
1a
2c
3b
Tower
Structure
Equipment
Earthing Bar
Buried Earthing Network
Item
Description
Part No.
1
1a
2a
2b
2c
3a
3b
4
Coax Cable
Cable Tie
Connector, N-male, straight for ODU
Connector, N-male, angle for IDU
Grounding Kit for coax cable
Grounding Cable for ODU
Grounding Cable for IDU
DC Power Supply Cable
See paragraph 1.1 Supplied as Cable Kit,

in this section
cable with ties (2 per m).
See paragraph 1.1
in this section
Supplied as Connector Kit.
Figure 6-1
B4029
Remarks
Included in
AWZP3
Cable Arrangement, Mandatory Items

97
IDU - ODU Cable Connector
SEALING
75N06D-1
BOTTOM OF
ODU BOX
BOTTOM OF
ODU BOX
N - CONNECTOR
female, chassis
HOSE CLAMP
97Z6A-5
N - CONNECTOR
N - CONNECTOR
male, cable
PROTECTION
SLEEVE
97E12A-1
APPLY SEALING
COMPOUND HERE
Protection Sleeve Kit ABZ278

PROTECTION
SLEEVE
1. Slide the Protection Sleeve and the Clamp Hose

over the connector and onto the cable.
2. Connect the cable to the ODU. Press the protection
sleeve over the connector and tighten the connector
by hand (using the sleeve gives a good hand-grip
when tightening).
HOSE CLAMP
3. Pull the protection sleeve backwards and apply

Sealing Compound (Plast 2000) onto the top end of
the sleeve. Press the sleeve upwards and over the
connector until it stops into the groove around the
ODU connectors nut and washer.
4. Adjust the clamp diameter with a screwdriver and
slide in the clamp as shown on the drawing and place
it over the connector head. Tighten the clamp with
a screwdriver.
Figure 6-2
98
Coax cable connection

B4029
Commissioning
SECTION III
Commissioning
B4054
99

100
B4054
Commissioning
1.0
External Connections
Fig. 1-1 Connector location
B4054
101
1.1
Phone Connections
Fig 1-2 Phone Connections

102
B4054
Commissioning
PHONE 4 (J21) and PHONE 5 (J31)

Invertible Modular jacks, 8 positions for SMT applications (RJ45).
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B4054
Description
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
TIP
RING
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
103
1.2
LAN Connections
Fig 1-3 LAN Connections

104
B4054
Commissioning
: line impedance)
LAN (TP) (J32, 100
Invertible modular jack, 8 positions, for SMT applications
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B4054
Description
Data+ output
Data- output
Data+ input
No Connection
No Connection
Data- input
No Connection
No Connection
105
1.3
NI Connections
Fig 1-4 NI Connections

106
B4054
Commissioning
NI-1 (J33)
D-Sub, 9-pins, female
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
NI-1, data- input
NI-1, data+ input
NI-1, GND
NI-1, data+ output
NI-1, data- output
NI-1, clk- input
NI-1, clk+ input
NI-1, clk+ output
NI-1, clk- output
NI-2 (J34)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B4054
Description
NI-2, data- input
NI-2, data+ input
NI-2, GND
NI-2, data+ output
NI-2, data- output
NI-2, clk- input
NI-2, clk+ input
NI-2, clk+ output
NI-2, clk- output
107
1.4
LCT1 Connection
10
INTFC A
ON
IN
IDU
4
INTFC A
INTFC A
3
2
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
ODU
PWR
ON
OFF
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
SUPERVISORY BD
SVCE BD
MODEM BD
ODU
5
INTFC A
MODEM BD
INVENTORY
CONTROL
6
INTFC A
MODEM BD
OUT
OFF
48VDC
7
INTFC A
ON
POWER
OFF
48VDC
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
PWR
ON
IN
IN
INVENTORY
CONTROL
POWER
OUT
OUT
OFF
48VDC
IDU
PWR
POWER
PWR
8
INTFC A
PWR
ON
OFF

TB2
TB3
IC1
S1
GND
+ -
GND
GND +
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
ON
- GND +
Fig 1-5 LCT1 Connection

108
B4054
Commissioning
LCT1 (P1)
D-Sub, 9-pins, male
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B4054
Description
No Connection
LCT1, RS-232C data input
LCT1, RS232C data output
Connected to pin 6
GND
Connected to pin 4
Connected to pin 8
Connected to pin 7
No Connection
109
1.5
LCT2 Connection
Fig 1-6 LCT2 Connection

110
B4054
Commissioning
LCT2 (P20)
D-Sub, 9-pins, male
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B4054
Description
No Connection
LCT2, RS-232C data input
LCT2, RS232C data output
Connected to pin 6
GND
Connected to pin 4
Connected to pin 8
Connected to pin 7
No Connection
111
1.6
Alarm Connections
Fig 1-7 Alarm Connections

112
B4054
Commissioning
ALMS (TB1)
Terminal Block, 16 connections
Conn. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
B4054
Description
Critical-alarm; closed when alarm is active
Critical-alarm; common terminal
Critical-alarm; open when alarm is active
Major/minor-alarm; closed when alarm is active
Major/minor-alarm; common terminal
Major/minor-alarm; open when alarm is active
Warning-indicator; closed when alarm is active
Warning-indicator; common terminal
Warning-indicator; open when alarm is active
Power ON-alarm (PWR 1); closed when alarm is active
Power ON-alarm (PWR 1); common terminal
Power ON-alarm (PWR 1); open when alarm is active
Power ON-alarm (PWR 2); closed when alarm is active
Power ON-alarm (PWR 2); common terminal
Power ON-alarm (PWR 2); open when alarm is active
Not used
113
1.7
Power Connections
Fig 1-8 Power Connections

114
B4054
Commissioning
PWR1 (P11)
Power D-Sub (2 power pins in a 9-pins D-Sub housing)
Pin No.
1
2
Description
Power 1, Input, +BAT (GND)
Power 1, Input, -BAT
PWR2 (P12)
Power D-Sub (2 power pins in a 9-pins D-Sub housing)
Pin No.
1
2
B4054
Description
Power 2, Input, +BAT (GND)
Power 2, Input, -BAT
115
1.8
Internal Power Distribution
Fig 1-9 Internal Power Distribution

116
B4054
Commissioning
Internal Power Distribution (TB2 and TB3)

Terminal Block, 6-connections
Conn. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
B4054
Description
Power-common fed, output, -BAT
GND
Power-common fed, output, +BAT
Power-common fed, output, -BAT
GND
Power-common fed, output, +BAT
117
1.9
External Connections
Fig 1-10 External Connections

118
B4054
Commissioning
External Connections (J1)

Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note!
B4054
Description
GND
GND
POSADR_A5 on Connection Panel
I2C-bus, clk.
External Alarm input #2
+3.3V output, from Alarm Display & Relay Board
POSADR_A6 on Connection Panel
I2C-bus, data
For future expansion. Internal Nera use only.

External alarm inputs are located on Auxiliary Services Board.
119
1.10
SU Serial Channels
Fig 1-11 SU Serial Channels

120
B4054
Commissioning
SU Serial Channels (J2)

Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Note!
B4054
Description
No Connection
Serial data, output
Serial data, input
No Connection
Serial data, GND
No Connection
Serial data, input
Serial data, output
No Connection
Internal Nera use only.
121
1.11
Board Interface
The Board Interface is available on the top of the Connection Panel.
1.11.1
Slot numbering and board placement

A Connection Board includes 11 slots (numbered from 0 to 10).
Note that the different connection areas on the upper part of the connection panel are marked with the slot number of the connected circuit board.
slot 0
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
slot
: for Alarm Display & Relay Board (between upper and

lower Power Filtering Boards)
1
: for upper Power Filtering Board
2
: for lower Power Filtering Board
3
: for Supervisory Board only
4
: for SVCE Board 1 when using telephone handset
connected to PHONE4, else for slot independent boards
5
: for SVCE Board 2 when using telephone handset
connected to PHONE5, else for slot independent boards
6-10 : Slot independent boards are:
- Modem Board (all versions)
- Interface Baseband Board (all versions, electrical line
interface)
- Optical Interface Baseband Board (all versions)
- SVCE Board (all versions) when not using the telephone
handset
- Auxiliary Services Board
Slot independent boards are all using the same basic connection area on
the upper part of the connection panel (the connection area to use is given
by the slot in which the circuit board is placed), but the different boards use
the available connectors individually.
Note that the Modem Board(s) and Interface Baseband Board(s) (electrical/optical) have to be mutually placed in an order determined by the
chosen system configuration.
The configuration wizard in NEW-NMS shows a layout of the board
placement based on the system parameters input.
122
B4054
Commissioning
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10
INTFC A
ON
ON
IN
IN
48VDC
IDU
POWER
OUT
OUT
OFF
PWR
OFF
48VDC
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
POWER
ON
OUT
IN
OFF
48VDC
PWR
POWER
PWR
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
INTFC A
3
2
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OU TPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPU T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OU TPUT
OUTPU T
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUT PUT
OUTPUT
ODU
PWR
ON
OFF
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
IDU
SUPERVISORY BD
SVCE BD
MODEM BD
MODEM BD
ODU
MODEM BD
INVENTORY
CONTROL
PWR
ON
OFF

TB2
TB2
TB3
IC1
S1
S1
GND
+ -
GND
GND
+ -
GND
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU
(SU TEST)
TEST)
J2
ON
Fig 1-12 Board Arrangement
B4054
123
Fig 1-13 Board Interface

124
B4054
Commissioning
1.11.2
Service Board PABX
a b c d e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)A
INTFC A /
(Slot No)B
INTFC A /
(Slot No)C
INTFC A /
(Slot No)D
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
G.703, Ch1
V.11, Ch2
Byte V.11 (Tx/Rx), Ch2
G.703, Ch3
V.11, Ch4
X
Other Equipment
Control
EOW
Call
4W, E/M-Wire
GND
X
X
GND
X
X
X
X
PABX Tip & Ring

GND
Ext. Loudsp. signal & GND
Ext. Tlf. Tip & Ring
GND
Co Directional, G.703
Contra Directional, G.703
V.11
Input Signal
Output Signal
GND
Not Connected
B4054
125
SVCE Board PABX Interface

Pin
no.
1a
1b
1c
1d
1e
2a
2b
2c
2d
2e
3a
3b
3c
3d
3e
4a
4b
4c
4d
4e
5a
5b
5c
5d
5e
6a
6b
6c
6d
6e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)a
INTFC A /
(Slot No)b
1TxD+_G703
1TxD-_G703
No Connection
1RxD+_G703
1RxD-_G703
1TxC+_G703
1TxC-_G703
No Connection
1RxC+_G703
1RxC-_G703
2TxD+_V11
2TxD-_V11
No Connection
2RxD+_V11
2RxD-_V11
2TxC+_V11
2TxC-_V11
No Connection
2RxC+_V11
2RxC-_V11
2TxB+_V11
2TxB-_V11
No Connection
2RxB+_V11
2RxB-_V11
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
3TxD+_G703
3TxD-_G703
No Connection
3RxD+_G703
3RxD-_G703
3TxC+_G703
3TxC-_G703
No Connection
3RxC+_G703
3RxC-_G703
4TxD+_V11
4TxD-_V11
No Connection
4RxD+_V11
4RxD-_V11
4TxC+_V11
4TxC-_V11
No Connection
4RxC+_V11
4RxC-_V11
4TxB+_V11
4TxB-_V11
No Connection
4RxB+_V11
4RxB-_V11
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
INTFC B /
Input
INTFC B /
Output
No Connection
No Connection
126
Description
INTFC A /
(Slot No)c
1OEINP_A
1OEINP_B
CTRL_INP
1OEOUT_A
1OEOUT_B
2OEINP_A
2OEINP_B
CTRL_OUT
2OEOUT_A
2OEOUT_B
EOWINP_A
EOWINP_B
CALL_INP
EOWOUT_A
EOWOUT_B
No Connection
No Connection
CALL_OUT
No Connection
No Connection
4WINP_A
4WINP_B
M_WIRE
4WOUT_A
4WOUT_B
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
E_WIRE
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
Description
INTFC C /
Input
No Connection
INTFC A /
(Slot No)d
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
No Connection
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
No Connection
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
PABX_T
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
PABX_R
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
EXTTEL_T
GND LS (PCB)
LOUDSP
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
EXTTEL_R
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
INTFC C /
Output
No Connection
B4054
Commissioning
1.11.3
Service Board (without PABX)
a b c d e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)A
INTFC A /
(Slot No)B
INTFC A /
(Slot No)C
INTFC A /
(Slot No)D
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
G.703, Ch1
V.11, Ch2
G.703, Ch3
V.11, Ch4
X
Other Equipment
Control
EOW
Call
4W, E/M-Wire
GND
GND
GND
X
X
Ext. Loudsp. signal & GND

Ext. Tlf. Tip & Ring
GND
V.11
Input Signal
Output Signal
GND
Not Connected
B4054
127
SVCE Board Interface

Pin
no.
1a
1b
1c
1d
1e
2a
2b
2c
2d
2e
3a
3b
3c
3d
3e
4a
4b
4c
4d
4e
5a
5b
5c
5d
5e
6a
6b
6c
6d
6e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)a
INTFC A /
(Slot No)b
1TxD+_G703
1TxD-_G703
No Connection
1RxD+_G703
1RxD-_G703
1TxC+_G703
1TxC-_G703
No Connection
1RxC+_G703
1RxC-_G703
2TxD+_V11
2TxD-_V11
No Connection
2RxD+_V11
2RxD-_V11
2TxC+_V11
2TxC-_V11
No Connection
2RxC+_V11
2RxC-_V11
2TxB+_V11
2TxB-_V11
No Connection
2RxB+_V11
2RxB-_V11
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
3TxD+_G703
3TxD-_G703
No Connection
3RxD+_G703
3RxD-_G703
3TxC+_G703
3TxC-_G703
No Connection
3RxC+_G703
3RxC-_G703
4TxD+_V11
4TxD-_V11
No Connection
4RxD+_V11
4RxD-_V11
4TxC+_V11
4TxC-_V11
No Connection
4RxC+_V11
4RxC-_V11
4TxB+_V11
4TxB-_V11
No Connection
4RxB+_V11
4RxB-_V11
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
INTFC B /
Input
INTFC B /
Output
No Connection
No Connection
128
Description
INTFC A /
(Slot No)c
1OEINP_A
1OEINP_B
CTRL_INP
1OEOUT_A
1OEOUT_B
2OEINP_A
2OEINP_B
CTRL_OUT
2OEOUT_A
2OEOUT_B
EOWINP_A
EOWINP_B
CALL_INP
EOWOUT_A
EOWOUT_B
No Connection
No Connection
CALL_OUT
No Connection
No Connection
4WINP_A
4WINP_B
M_WIRE
4WOUT_A
4WOUT_B
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
E_WIRE
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
Description
INTFC C /
Input
No Connection
INTFC A /
(Slot No)d
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
No Connection
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
No Connection
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
No Connection
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
No Connection
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
EXTTEL_T
GND LS (PCB)
LOUDSP
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
EXTTEL_R
GND (PCB)
GND (PCB)
INTFC C /
Output
No Connection
B4054
Commissioning
1.11.4
a b c d e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)A
INTFC A /
(Slot No)B
INTFC A /
(Slot No)C
INTFC A /
(Slot No)D
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
ALARM INP
ALARM INP
ALARM INP
ALARM INP
ALARM INP
ALARM INP
ALARM INP
ALARM INP
ANALOG INP
RELAY OUTP
250mA
RELAY OUTP
1A
V.11
Input Signal
Output Signal
GND
Not Connected
B4054
129
Auxiliary Services Board Interface

Pin
no.
1a
1b
1c
1d
1e
2a
2b
2c
2d
2e
3a
3b
3c
3d
3e
4a
4b
4c
4d
4e
5a
5b
5c
5d
5e
6a
6b
6c
6d
6e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)a
ALM_1+
ALM_1ALM_5+
ALM_2+
ALM_2ALM_3+
ALM_3ALM_5ALM_4+
ALM_4ALM_6+
ALM_6ALM_10+
ALM_7+
ALM_7ALM_8+
ALM_8ALM_10ALM_9+
ALM_9ALM_11+
ALM_11ALM_15+
ALM_12+
ALM_12ALM_13+
ALM_13ALM_15ALM_14+
ALM_14-
INTFC A /
(Slot No)b
ALM_16+
ALM_16ALM_20+
ALM_17+
ALM_17ALM_18+
ALM_18ALM_20ALM_19+
ALM_19ALM_21+
ALM_21ALM_25+
ALM_22+
ALM_22ALM_23+
ALM_23ALM_25ALM_24+
ALM_24ALM_26+
ALM_26ALM_30+
ALM_27+
ALM_27ALM_28+
ALM_28ALM_30ALM_29+
ALM_29-
INTFC B /
Input
INTFC B /
Output
No Connection
No Connection
130
Description
INTFC A /
(Slot No)c
ALM_31+
ALM_31ALM_35+
ALM_32+
ALM_32ALM_33+
ALM_33ALM_35ALM_34+
ALM_34ALM_36+
ALM_36ALM_40+
ALM_37+
ALM_37ALM_38+
ALM_38ALM_40ALM_39+
ALM_39ANALOG_1
ANALOG_2
ANALOG_GND
ANALOG_3
ANALOG_4
ANALOG_5
ANALOG_6
ANALOG_GND
ANALOG_7
ANALOG_8
Description
INTFC C /
Input
No Connection
INTFC A /
(Slot No)d
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
RELAY_2a
No Connection
No Connection
RELAY_1a
RELAY_1b
RELAY_2b
RELAY_3a
RELAY_3b
RELAY_4a
RELAY_4b
RELAY_5a
RELAY_6a
RELAY_6b
RELAY_7a
RELAY_7b
RELAY_5b
RELAY_8a
RELAY_8b
INTFC C /
Output
No Connection
B4054
Commissioning
1.11.5
Interface Baseband Boards
a b c d e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)A
INTFC A /
(Slot No)B
INTFC A /
(Slot No)C
INTFC A /
(Slot No)D
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
2.048 Mb/s Wayside
V.11
Input Signal
Output Signal
GND
Not Connected
B4054
131
Interface Baseband Boards Board Interface

Pin
no.
1a
1b
1c
1d
1e
2a
2b
2c
2d
2e
3a
3b
3c
3d
3e
4a
4b
4c
4d
4e
5a
5b
5c
5d
5e
6a
6b
6c
6d
6e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)a
INTFC A /
(Slot No)b
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Description
INTFC A /
(Slot No)c
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
INTFC B /
Input
INTFC B /
Output
Description
INTFC C /
Input
No Connection
No Connection
155M_INP
132
INTFC A /
(Slot No)d
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
2M_Tx_Way+
2M_Tx_WayNo Connection
2M_Rx_Way+
2M_Rx_WayNo Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
INTFC C /
Output
155M_OUTP
B4054
Commissioning
1.11.6
Modem Board STM-1
a b c d e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)A
INTFC A /
(Slot No)B
INTFC A /
(Slot No)C
INTFC A /
(Slot No)D
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Ind-Outd
Interface
V.11
Input Signal
Output Signal
GND
Not Connected
B4054
133
Modem Board STM-1 Interface

Pin
no.
1a
1b
1c
1d
1e
2a
2b
2c
2d
2e
3a
3b
3c
3d
3e
4a
4b
4c
4d
4e
5a
5b
5c
5d
5e
6a
6b
6c
6d
6e
INTFC A /
(Slot No)a
INTFC A /
(Slot No)b
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
INTFC B /
Input
No Connection
134
INTFC B /
Output
ER_PULSE
Description
INTFC A /
(Slot No)c
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Description
INTFC C /
Input
No Connection
INTFC A /
(Slot No)d
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
D+3.3V
GND
No Connection
I2C_SDA
I2C_SCL
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
INTFC C /
Output
No Connection
B4054
Commissioning
1.12
E3/DS3
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 5
Ch 6
Ch 7
Ch 8
INPUT
1
OUTPUT
INPUT
2
OUTPUT
INP UT
3
OUTPUT
E3/DS3
E3/DS3
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 5
Ch 6
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
OFF
OFF
Ch 7
Aux Subrack
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
OFF
OFF
Ch 8
INPUT
10
9
IN T F C A
INT F C A
INT F C A
INT F C A
INT F C A
IN T F C A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
IN T F C A
ON
ON
OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
RMV
RMV
RMV
RMV
RMV
RMV
RST
RST
SVCE BD
OFF
48VDC
IDU
SUPERVISO RY BD
IN
IN
IDU
POWER
OUT
OUT
OFF
48VDC
PWR
INDOOR OUTDOOR INTE RFACE UNIT
POWER
INPUT
PWR
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
WARNING
INVENTORY
CONTROL
INPUT
POWER
ON
OUT
PWR
ON
OFF
RMV
RST
RST
RST
MO DEM BD
ODU
RST
MO DEM BD
RST
MO DEM BD
IN
OFF
48VDC
IDU
E3/DS3
ODU
PWR
INVENTORY
CONTROL
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
3
OUTPUT
PWR
ON
OFF
TRAN
TRANS
SCEI
CEIV
VERPO
PO WE
WER
R CONNEC
CO NNECT
TIO
IO N
NS
S
T
TB
B22
TB3
TB3
S1
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
IC1
ON
E3/DS3
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4
GND
+ -
GND
GND
Ch 5
+ -
GND
Ch 6
Ch 7
Ch 8
INPUT
1
O UT PU T
INPUT
2
O UT PU T
INPUT
3
O UT PU T
E3/DS3
15
INTFC A
14
INTFC A
13
INTFC A
12
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
INTFC A
3
2
B4054
135
Inp 1
Inp 1
Out 1
Inp 2
Out 2
Note!
Out 2
Out 2
Out 2
Out 1
Out 2
Out 1
Inp 2
Out 2
Inp 3
Out 3
Channel 8
Inp 1
Out 1
Inp 2
Inp 3
Out 3
Channel 7
Inp 1
Out 1
Inp 2
Inp 3
Out 3
Channel 6
Inp 1
Out 1
Inp 2
Inp 3
Out 3
Channel 5
Inp 1
Out 1
Inp 2
Inp 3
Out 3
Channel 4
Inp 1
Out 1
Inp 2
Inp 3
Out 3
136
Inp 1
Out 1
Inp 2
Inp 3
Channel 3
Channel 2
Channel 1
Description
Out 2
Inp 3
Out 3
Out 3
Wayside connections as in Chapter 1.11.5
B4054
Commissioning
2.0
2.1
Configuration
Setting of Subrack address
10
ON
ON
IN
IN
IDU
POWER
OUT
OUT
OFF
48VDC
PWR
OFF
48VDC
IDU
INVENTORY
CONTROL
INVENTORY
CONTROL
ODU
POWER
ON
OUT
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
INTFC A
2
D
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
INPUT
INTFC B
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUT PUT
OUTPUT
OUTP UT
OUT PUT
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
IN TFC C
INTFC C
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPU T
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ODU
PWR
ON
OFF
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
SVCE BD
SUPERVISORY BD
RMV
RST
MODEM BD
RMV
RST
RMV
RST
MODEM BD
48VDC
7
INTFC A
IN
OFF
PWR
POWER
PWR
8
INTFC A
INTFC A
IDU
ODU
MODEM BD
INVENTORY
CONTROL
PWR
ON
OFF

TB2
TB3
IC1
S1
GND
+ -
GND
GND
+ -
GND
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
ON
Fig. 2-1 Subrack Addresses

B4054
137
ON = 1 ON
OFF = 0
Subrack addresses (S1)

Switch 1 (A6)
0 / OFF
0 / OFF
1 / ON
1 / ON
Note!
138
Switch 2 (A5)
0 / OFF
1 / ON
0 / OFF
1 / ON
Address
Connection Panel address 0
(00)
(01)
(10)
(11)
The Subrack address switch is factory preset and must not be altered.
Correct switch position is OFF for both switches.
B4054
Commissioning
3.0 Power on (incl. NEW-NMS start-up and initial config.)

3.1
General
This chapter assumes that the radio terminal has been installed according
to the guidelines in Sections II Installation.
Verify that the cable between the radio terminal and the PC running the
configuration & setup program is connected.
3.2
Power on
Apply power to the radio terminal by turning the switch on the Power
Filters in the Subrack and Aux-Subrack if mounted. The radio link start-up
procedure and self-diagnostics will execute.
When power is applied to the radio terminal the system will perform self test,
this will take a few seconds.
3.3
NEW-Configurator Start-up and

connecting to Network Elements
The NEW-Configurator (Nera Element vieW-Configurator) program must
be installed on a PC with the following minimum requirements:
Win98, Win2000 or Windows XP Prof. English versions

Pentium 300 MHz processor
128MB memory
1.5 GB disk size
1 COM port
CD-ROM drive
Follow carefully the program installation instructions to make sure the

program is successfully installed.
The element viewer can monitor the Network Elements (NEs) using a serial
connection (RS-232) or a TCP/IP connection (or both for different network
elements). Apply all external connections to the PC before the program is
started.
A serial connection must be used the first time the network manager/
configurator is connected to the InterLink, because the IP address must be
set in the InterLink, before a TCP/IP connection can be established.
B4054
139
3.3.1

Serial Connection (RS-232/ LCT).
Apply the serial cable to one of the serial ports of the PC and the LCT port
of the InterLink. Start the program. A Log on dialogue box pops up. Log on
to the network with your user id and password.
Note!
NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account:

User ID:
admin
Password:
adminpasswd
It is strongly recommended to change this password!
The program has an auto discover function which automatically discovers
NEs connected to the serial ports of the PC when starting. If some NEs are
connected to the serial ports of the PC, the network topology is automatically discovered and presented in the Explorer view. Press Add to include
discovered elements in the network topology of the program. The auto
discover function can also be manually executed by selecting Discover
from the File menu. When discovering the network manually, the program
looks for NEs at the open ports listed in the Communication dialogue box
(select Communication from the Configuration menu).
3.3.2

TCP/IP Connection.
(Assumes the TCP/IP address is configured in the InterLink )

Apply Ethernet connections to both the InterLink and PC. Start the
program. A Log on dialogue box pops up. Log on to the network with your
user id and password.
Note!
NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account:

User ID:
admin
Password:
adminpasswd
It is strongly recommended to change this password!
The program does not know the IP-address of the network element so the
connection must be manually established. To configure a TCP/IP connection to the network element, select Communication from the Configuration menu. Press the Add button and type the IP address of the NE in
the address field of the dialogue box which pops up. Press OK to save the
changes, and OK to close the Communication Configuration dialogue
box. Select Discover from the File menu. Press Add to include discovered elements in the network topology of the program. The accepted
network elements will be discovered and presented in the Explorer view.
140
B4054
Commissioning
3.4
Initial configuration
When the program has established contact with the InterLink, some
configurations must be set before antenna alignment can be performed.
See Element ID and Unit Housekeeping in Section IV, Operators
Guide.
You are now ready to proceed with antenna alignment.
B4054
141
4.0
Antenna alignment
The purpose of the alignment procedure is to obtain maximum signal level
and cross polarization discrimination by aligning two antennas in opposite
directions.
The antennas should be properly mounted (Follow the manufacturers
mechanical alignment instructions) and polarized in the same way. It must
be possible to transmit from one antenna and receive on the other. The best
way is to have a transmitter and a receiver connected to both antennas.
4.1
Procedure for Coarse-alignment

Adjust both antennas to correct directions as precisely as possible by
using magnetic compass or optical sight.
4.2
Procedure for Fine-alignment

Fine adjustment is achieved by sending a signal from one of the antennas.
On the receive side various methods may be used.
a) Measure the AGC voltage from the transceiver
b) Read the received level on a spectrum analyser
c) Measure the received power with a Power Meter
This procedure describes antenna alignment by use of AGC Voltage.
The AGC Voltage is available at a test point on the lower part of the Sub rack.
Operate the supervisory system to manually switch the equipment to Ch1.
See Section IV, Operators Guide, Chapter 2.3.1.5.
Mute the transmitter at the receive station to exclude interference from
this source.
A voltmeter must be connected to the AGC2 connector and ground, and
preferably monitored by the person who is adjusting the antenna. Adjust
alternatively in azimuth and elevation until the received signal reaches
maximum level. Try a few times in each direction.
The antenna should be turned so much that the first side lobes are seen,
thereby ensuring that the antenna is aligned to the main lobe.
142
B4054
Commissioning
AGC Diagram
-2V
-7V
-70 dBm
-20 dBm
AGC 1 Connector
AGC 2 Connector
Note!
In a 1+1 system AGC1 is AGC connector for Protection Channel and

AGC2 is connector for Ch1.
Fig. 4-1 AGC Connectors
B4054
143
When the antenna is correctly adjusted, secure all bolts. Monitor the
instrument during this operation and if necessary realign the antenna.
When adjustments are completed on the first antenna, the same procedure
is performed on the opposite antenna.
4.3
Cross Polarization Adjustment

After alignment of the antenna, the antenna feed must be adjusted horizontally and vertically. Loosen the flange which secures the feed to the
reflector. Align the feed by using a spirit leveller. Secure the flange.
4.4
Final Control
When all adjustments are performed check that the input level agrees with
the one theoretically calculated. If the input level is too low, adjust the
antennas once more. Finally, ensure that all bolts and nuts are properly
mounted and secured.
144
B4054
Operators Guide
SECTION IV
Operators Guide
B4029
145

146
B4029
Operators Guide
1.0
Introduction
The InterLink-family of radio equipment supports a wide range of element
management functions: Security, Configuration, Fault and Performance.
All these functions can be managed by the PC based network management
program, NEW. NEW supports different families of Nera radio equipment, including the InterLink. This section describes the management
functions of the InterLink network element and the corresponding element management functions in NEW.
1.1
NEW
NEW is a fully compliant 32-bits Windows application running on PC with
the following operating system requirements:
NEW-Configurator: Windows 98, Windows 2000 or Windows XP Prof.
English versions.
NEW-NMS: Windows 2000 or Windows XP English versions.
This manual describes the functionality of NEW that applies to the
InterLink family of network elements. See the NEW-NMS Manual or program
help system for more information about NEW.
1.1.1
Versions
The NEW program can either be used as a network element configuration
tool (NEW-Configurator) or a network management system (NEWNMS). A hardware key, connected to the PCs parallel port contains user
license information which is used by NEW to determine whether to run the
program in Configurator mode or in NMS mode. This licence information
also includes the number of elements and the family of equipment to be
supported by NEW. To upgrade your license, contact NERA and you will
receive upgrading information.
1.1.1.1
NEW-NMS
When a licensed hardware key is connected to the PCs parallel port, the
program will run as NEW-NMS with the restrictions given by the hardware
key. NEW-NMS is a network manager offering a wide range of network
management facilities. NEW-NMS is also available in a client/server
configuration. [See the NEW-NMS manual for more details]
B4029
147
1.1.1.2
NEW-Configurator
If no hardware key is connected when NEW is started, the program will run
in Configurator mode. The NEW-Configurator can only monitor and
configure two network elements simultaneously. Typical network management functions are not supported by this version (e.g. Database logging and
Map View).
1.1.2
Graphical User Interface (GUI)
1.1.2.1
Menus
The different functions and user interfaces in NEW can be accessed
through the main menu or context menus in the different views. Some of
the main menu commands are only enabled when certain objects are
selected. These menus are marked with the symbol.
1.1.2.2
Explorer View
NEW can present the network of elements in two different main views:
Explorer View and Map View. (The Map View is only available in the
NEW-NMS version and is described in the NEW-NMS User Manual).
The Explorer View is automatically displayed when the first NE is
detected by NEW. This window displays a hierarchical presentation of all
detected NEs in the network. The nodes in the tree contain different
context menus for configuration and surveillance. They also displays
alarm severity information by using colours.
The InterLink NE is divided into two main branches: Equipment and
Transmission. The Transmission branch contains information related to
the customer traffic while the Equipment branch contains Equipment
related information.
148
B4029
Operators Guide
1.1.2.3
Physical View
A physical drawing of the network element can be displayed from the
context menu on the NE node. The different boards/units in the view
contain the same context menus as the corresponding tree nodes in the
Explorer View.
Note that this view does not display any alarm information (The LED
indicators does not represent any actual alarm status). The front cover is
not displayed.
B4029
149
1.1.2.4
Schematic View
A schematic drawing of the system configuration can be displayed from a
menu command on the NE node. This block diagram shows how the boards/
units are interconnected by means of traffic. The different units in the view
contain the same context menus as the corresponding tree nodes in the
Explorer View.
Note that this view does not display any switching or alarm information.
150
B4029
Operators Guide
1.1.3
Communication
NEW communicates with the Network Elements through different communication ports: serial ports, modem ports or TCP/IP ports.
The serial ports and modems registered by the operating system are automatically
detected while TCP/IP ports have to be added manually.
A backup port can be assigned for each port. The backup port will be used when a
message on the main port times out. When using the backup port, messages are
periodically also sent to the main port in order to detect whether the main port has
recovered. If the message times out when using the backup port, the message gets
lost, even if the backup port has its own backup port. In other words; the message
will only be routed one level through the backup system.
Note that NEW will try to keep the port in the selected state. This means that if the
port is disconnected by any reason other than the user pressing the Disconnect
button, NEW will automatically try to reconnect. NEW will automatically retry the
connect attempts using an increasing interval of time (up to maximum 5 minutes
retry interval).
B4029
151
1.1.3.1
Discovering Network Elements

When starting NEW, opening a network file or selecting the Discover
command from the File menu the auto discover process is initiated:
When starting NEW from scratch all available serial communication
ports are attempted opened. Broadcast messages are sent to all open ports
using several different baud rates to detect connected network elements
(115200, 9600 and 1200).
When opening a network file the communication settings saved in the
network file are used in the discovering process. NEW loads the communication port settings and status form the network file. Broadcast messages
are sent to all open ports to detect connected network elements.
When selecting the Discover command from the File menu the current
communication settings are used in the discovering process. Broadcast
messages are sent to all open ports to detect connected network elements.
If a correct response is received from a network element, the Add Element
dialogue box is displayed where the user can add the element to NEW.
Dialogue box controls:

Max elements to be added: The maximum number of network elements
to be managed by NEW according to the licence information in the
hardware key. If no hardware key is connected, the maximum number of
elements is 2.
Left list: Discovered network elements.
Right list: The network elements to be managed by NEW.
Add All button: Moves all network elements from the Left list to the
Right list.
Add Selected button: Moves selected network elements from the Left
list to the Right list.
152
B4029
Operators Guide
Remove Selected button: Moves selected network elements from the
Right list to the Left list.
Remove All button: Moves all network elements from the Right list to the
Left list.
OK button: Adds the network elements in the Right list to NEW and
closes the dialogue box.
Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box.
Help button: Displays help for this dialogue box.
1.1.3.2
Communication Settings
The Communication settings can be displayed/configured in the Communication dialogue box in the Configuration menu.

Communication Ports: List of all available communication ports.
- Status: Indicates the state of the communication ports. Possible
states: Connected, Connecting..., Disconnecting..., Disconnected.
For modem ports the call states are also displayed.
- Port: Name of the communication port.
- Backup: Name of the communication backup port.
- Network: The associated sub-network of the communication port. To
change sub-network, double-click the field and choose between available sub-networks.
- Timeout Limit (ms): Sets the global time (in milliseconds) that NEW
will wait for acknowledgement on a message before re-sending it.
When the check-box is unchecked, the individual NE time-out values
are used. [See NEW-NMS Manual]
B4029
153
Close button: Closes the dialogue box.
Connect button: Opens the selected communication port. A discover message
is sent on the port if the connection succeeds.
Disconnect button: Closes the selected communication port.
Remove button: Removes the selected communication port. (Applies to TCP/
IP ports only)
Add button: Adds a communication port. (Applies to TCP/IP ports only)
Settings button: Displays a Port Settings dialogue box for the selected communication port, where the port can be configured.
Elements button: Displays the Element Communication Map dialogue box
where each network elements communication settings can be configured [See
the NEW-NMS Manual]
Networks button: Displays the Sub-network Administration dialogue box where
sub-networks can be created or deleted. [see the NEW-NMS Manual]
1.1.3.3
Serial Port Settings

The Serial Port Settings dialogue box displays/configures the settings for
the selected serial port.
Dialogue box controls (the configuration to use with InterLink elements are
displayed in brackets):
Baud Rate: The number of bits transmitted per second (Default: 115200).
Data Bits: The number of bits in a word of data (8).
Parity: The number of parity bits used for Forward Error Correction (None)
Stop bits: The number of stop bits used to indicate where each word of
data ends (1).
154
B4029
Operators Guide
Flow control: The way to control the transmission rate of characters or
messages on the link (None).
OK button: Applies the current control settings and closes the dialogue box.
Default button: Loads the serial ports default settings into the controls
(115200, 8, None, 1, None).
Help button: displays help for this dialogue box
1.1.3.4
TCP/IP Port Settings

The TCP/IP Port Settings dialogue box displays/configures the settings
for the selected TCP/IP port. Note that NEW uses TCP-port 5070 for
accessing a InterLink element via the Ethernet interface.

Address: The TCP/IP address.
Network: Indicates the associated sub-network of the port. All NEs
reached by a specific port belongs to the sub-network of that port. The
drop-down combo box can be used to choose between available subnetworks. (Default: Main)
SNMP Element: Used to connect to NEs supporting the Simple Network Management Protocol. Not used with InterLink.
OK button: Applies the current control settings and closes the dialogue box.
Network button: Displays the sub-network administration dialogue box.
[see the NEW-NMS Manual]
Help button: displays help for this dialogue box.
Modem Port Settings:
[see the NEW-NMS manual]
B4029
155
2.0
2.1
Configuration
NE Node
The following table describes the configuration functions for the NE node.
Context menu:
Menu text
Unit Housekeeping Wizard
Element ID
Available Functions
Notifications
NE Clock
Configuration Upload
Configuration Download
Restore Configuration
SW Versions
SW Download
Remote Reset
2.1.1
Description
Displays a wizard for NE system configuration
Displays the Element ID property sheet
Displays the Available Functions property sheet
Displays the Notifications property sheet
Displays the NE Clock property sheet
Uploads configuration data from NE to file
Downloads configuration data from file to the NE
Sets default configuration on NE
Displays the SW Versions property sheet
Downloads SW from file to NE
Resets the NE across the hop.
System Configuration and Unit Housekeeping

Assembling different sub-racks, boards and units into a network element
is facilitated through a set of system configuration functions. Which units/
boards to be used for a specific system configuration, and their placement
within the system, are defined by a set of rules. These rules are partly set
by hardware and partly managed by the user through system configuration
functions. The Supervisory Board controls the system configuration through
a set of functions that is configured from NEW:
NEW provides a wizard for setting the system configuration. The placement of boards/units are set through this wizard. Transceiver Units,
Modem Boards, and Interface Baseband Boards are associated with a
transmission channel and direction.
Alarms are reported if there is a difference between the configured system
and the units/boards detected by the Supervisory Board. NEW is notified
if changes in the system configuration are detected and provides different user interfaces for handling the situations.
The process of replacing a board/unit is facilitated through automatic
configuration by the SU. NEW provides a wizard for replacing the
Supervisory Board.
2.1.1.1
Alarms
Alarms are generated if the Supervisory Board detects any deviation from
the configured system:
BOARD-INCORRECT-PLACED: A board/unit has been detected in a slot
that violates the board/unit placement rules. Remove the board/unit.
NEW-BOARD-DETECTED: A board/unit has been detected in a slot that
is configured to be used for a different type of board/unit. When this alarm
is detected by NEW the configuration context menu of the board/unit is
156
B4029
Operators Guide
2.1.1.2
replaced with a New Board Detected menu item. Select this menu
command to display the NEW Board Detected dialogue box where an
appropriate action can be performed.
NEW-TRANSCEIVER-DETECTED: A Transceiver Unit that does not
support Space Diversity has been configured as a Space Diversity
Transceiver. Replace the Transceiver Unit with a correct type or use the
Unit Housekeeping Wizard to change the Space Diversity system
configuration.
UNIT-BEING-REPLACED: This alarm is generated when the reset button
on the board has been pressed for less than 2 seconds. The alarm stays
active for 15 seconds and is indicated on the board by a flashing alarm
diode. When this alarm is active the board can be replaced in a controlled
manner. On the Supervisory Board this alarm initiates a replace unit
process [see the Replacing Boards/Units section].
NEED-CONFIG: This alarm is generated on the board if the specific board
does not contain valid system configuration data (typically after a system
configuration or board replacement process). This alarm initiates an
immediate configuration download from the Supervisory Board to the
board. If this alarm is generated on the Supervisory Board the system
configuration must be set from NEW, using the Unit Housekeeping
Wizard or the Configuration Download function. If NEW is connected to
the NE directly through the LCT port, a System Change Detected dialogue
box pops up [see the System Change Detected section].
LOST-CONTACT-WITH-UNIT: This alarm indicates loss of communication between the Supervisory Board and the specific board/unit.
Supported systems and boards/units

Supported systems:
N+0 Terminal, where N=1..3
N+1 Terminal without Low Priority Traffic, where N=1..2
N+1 Terminal with Low Priority Traffic, where N=1..2
Hot Stand-by Terminal (one interface board)
(Dual polarization and co-channel is supported on all the above systems
except Hot Stand-by Terminal.
B4029
157
Supported Boards/Units:
Baseband sub-rack for Smaller Systems
Outdoor sub-rack
Auxiliary sub-rack
Supervisory Board
Alarm Display & Relay Board
Power Filtering Board
SVCE Board
SVCE Board PABX
Electrical (STS-3/STM-1) E1 Wayside Interface Baseband Board
Electrical (STS-3/STM-1) DS3/E3 Wayside Interface Baseband Board
Optical (OC-3 SM/STM-1 S-1.1) E1 Wayside Interface Baseband Board
Optical (OC-3 SM/STM-1 S-1.1) DS1/E1 Wayside Interface Baseband
Board
Optical (OC-3 MM SR-0) E1 Wayside Interface Baseband Board
Optical (OC-3 MM SR-0) DS1/E1 Wayside Interface Baseband Board
Optical (OC-3 SM LR-1/STM-1 L-1.1) DS1/E1 Wayside Interface Baseband Board
Optical (OC-3 SM LR-2/STM-1 L-1.2) DS1/E1 Wayside Interface Baseband Board
Modem Board
Indoor Outdoor Interface Unit (IOIU)
Transceiver Unit
Transceiver Unit SD
158
B4029
Operators Guide
2.1.1.3
Board/Unit placement rules

The placement rules are partly set by hardware and partly managed by the
user through system configuration functions.
Smaller Systems
IDU: This sub-rack contains a compartment for the Connection-Panel
and compartments for IDU - ODU Interface Unit.
- Alarm Display & Relay Board: Slot 0.
- Power Filters: Slot 1 and/or 2.
- Supervisory board: Slot 3.
- SVCE Boards: Slot 4 and 5. Slot 4 is used if there is only one SVCE
Board.
- Modem and Interface Baseband Boards: These boards are placed in
Slot 10 to 5 in the Connection-Panel. Boards are placed from left to
right (starting with Slot 10) according to their associated channel
number in this order: Ch.P - Ch.1 Ch.N. For Terminal systems, the
Modem Boards are always placed to the left of the corresponding
Interface Baseband Boards. The following table shows the placement
of Modem- and Interface Baseband- Boards for different channel
arrangements (I=Interface Baseband Board, M=Modem Board)
Auxiliary Sub-rack: This sub-rack may contain up to 8 Power Filtering
Boards. There is normally one Power Filtering Board for each Transceiver Unit.
ODU: Systems with 1 or 2 transceivers are using 1 ODU. In addition to
the transceivers, the ODU contains a branching unit. Systems with 3
transceivers need an additional ODU.
System Configuration Examples, smaller systems Sub-rack slot positions

10 9
8
7
6
5
1+0 Terminal
M1 I1
1+1 Terminal (single polarization)
MP
M1 I 1
1+1 Terminal with LPT (single polarization)
M P I P M1 I 1
M 1 I 1 M2 I 2
Mp
M1 I 1 M2 I 2
M 1 I 1 M2 I 2 M3 I 3
HSB Terminal (one interface board)
M1 I1 M2
HSB Dual Baseband Terminal (two interface
M1 I 1 M2 I 2
boards)
B4029
159
2.1.1.4
Unit Housekeeping Wizard

NEW provides a wizard for displaying and setting the system configuration.
A dynamic preview window presents the system configuration either
physically or schematically.
Step 1:
Note!
160
Step 1 controls: Selects the basic system configuration.

Subrack system:
- Smaller Systems: Systems using the Baseband Subrack for Smaller
Systems.
- Larger Systems: Systems using the Baseband Subrack for Larger
Systems.
Stacking mode: Two different ways of stacking Modem- and Interface
Baseband Boards into the Baseband Subrack
- Compact: The Modem- and Interface Baseband Boards are placed as
compact as possible, starting at the left side of the Baseband Subrack.
Compact can only be used on older equipment. In newer equipment,
"Fixed" must be selected.
- Fixed: The Modem- and Interface Baseband Boards are placed in fixed
slot positions. If LPT is not selected in a N+1 system, there is an empty
slot available for the Interface Baseband Board for ch. P in case of future
upgrade. For Double Terminal System Configuration in Larger Systems
Subrack, the stacking of dir 2 boards always start at slot position 13,
leaving empty slots for future upgrades.
B4029
Operators Guide
Incl. dual polarization: Whether to use single or dual polarization.
Terminal type:
- Terminal: Channels are arranged for one antenna direction
- Double terminal: Channels are arranged for two antenna directions.
Transmission system:
- SDH
- SONET
B4029
161
Step 2:
Step 2 controls: Selects the channel arrangements and boards.

Regular channels: The number of regular channels. Possible values: 1..4.
Protection channels: The number of protection channels. Possible values:
0 or 1.
LPT on protection channel: Whether to use an Interface Baseband Board
for the protection channel. This channel can then be used for Low
Priority Traffic on the protection channel when no other channels are
using protection.
Hot stand-by: Whether a 2+0 system is configured as HSB.
Dual baseband: Whether a HSB system perform RX switching. In a Dual
baseband HSB system there are two Interface Baseband Boards while in
a regular HSB system there are one Interface Baseband Board.
Space Divercity: Whether the system is configured as Space Divercity.
Split-Mount: Has to be selected for Split-Mount systems.
ODU XT must be selected when the XT ODU is used.
162
B4029
Operators Guide
Step 3:
Step 3 controls: Selects additional boards/units.

Auxiliary Boards: Number of Auxiliary Services boards. Can be placed in
any free slots.
SVCE Boards: Number of SVCE boards. Possible values: 0, 1 and 2. Placed
from right to left in slot 4 and 5 (left of Supervisory Board).
Power filtering boards: The number and placement of Power Filtering
Boards in the Baseband Sub-rack and in the Auxiliary Sub-rack.
B4029
163
Step 4:
Step 4 controls: List of all board/unit types created by the selections in

the previous steps. Different variants of the board/unit types can be
selected by either double-clicking in the list or by double-clicking on the
board/unit in the preview window.
164
B4029
Operators Guide
2.1.1.5
System Change Detected

The System Change Detected dialogue box is automatically displayed
when the Supervisory Board generates a NEED-CONFIG alarm (only if
NEW is connected to the NE directly through the LCT port). The NEEDCONFIG alarm is generated if:
The Supervisory Unit contains incomplete system configuration data.
The Supervisory Board has been moved from another Sub-rack. If the
Replace Unit Wizard is used in the replace process, this dialogue will
not be displayed.
Dialogue controls:
OK button: Performs the action specified by the selected radio button
and then closes this dialogue box.
Use Unit Housekeeping Wizard to set system configuration: Launches the
Unit Housekeeping Wizard where the system configuration can be set.
Configuration Download button: Starts the process of downloading
configuration from file.
2.1.1.6
New Board Detected

The New Board Detected dialogue box is displayed from the New Board
Wizard configuration context menu when the boards NEW BOARD
DETECTED alarm is active. This alarm is generated by the SU on behalf
of the board when the board type detected in the specific slot position is
different from the system configuration in the SU.
B4029
165
Dialogue controls:
Unit Housekeeping Wizard button: Launches the Unit Housekeeping
Wizard where the system configuration can be set. This button is visible
if a change to this new board type does not affect the existing system
configuration.
Accept New Board button: Sends a message to the SU telling that the new
board type is OK. This button is visible if the new board type conflicts
with the existing system configuration.
Cancel: Closes the dialogue box.
2.1.1.7
Replacing Boards/Units:
The Supervisory Board keeps a copy of the configuration and SW on the
different boards/units. If a board/unit is replaced, the configuration will be
automatically downloaded from the Supervisory Board to the new Board/
Unit, and new SW must be downloaded manually if required.
Replacement procedures:
Transceiver Unit, Modem Board, Interface Baseband Board, SVCE Board:
- Press the board/units Reset button for at least 2 seconds but less than 5
seconds. The UNIT-BEING-REPLACED alarm is generated and the
board/units alarm LED starts blinking.
- Replace the board/unit.
- The Supervisory Board automatically starts downloading configuration
data to the new board/unit. If the SW version of the new board/unit differs
from the corresponding active SW component on the Supervisory Board
the SW component must be downloaded to the new board/unit (a DOWNLOAD-IN-PROGRESS alarm is generated on the board/unit).
166
B4029
Operators Guide
Supervisory Board: Start the Replace Unit Wizard from the Configuration
menu on the SU Board node. This wizard guides you through the steps of
copying the configuration data from the replaced/old Supervisory Board to
the replacement/new Supervisory Board. The NE must be directly connected to a serial port in NEW in order to copy the configuration:
- Step 1: Introduction
- Step 2: Detects whether NEW is connected directly through a serial port
to NE where the Supervisory Board is to be replaced. Also retrieves
Element ID data from the old Supervisory Board.
- Step 3: Uploads configuration data from the old Supervisory board.
- Step 4: Activates the UNIT-BEING-REPLACED alarm on the Supervisory Board. The boards alarm LED starts blinking. The board can now be
replaced.
- Step 5: When the board has been replaced and the new Supervisory
Board SW has booted, this step detects the new Supervisory Board on the
serial port.
- Step 6: Copies Element ID data to the new Supervisory Board.
- Step 7: Downloads configuration data to the new Supervisory Board.
The replacement process is now finished.
2.1.2
Element ID
The Element ID property sheet displays/configures the identification data
for the Network Element.
Property sheet controls:

Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element.
Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element.
Note that the SU will be rebooted if any settings have been changed.
Close button: Closes the property sheet
Help Button: Displays help for the active page
B4029
167
Property page controls:
NE type: The type of Network Element (product family). Factory preset
(not changeable).
Name: The name of the Network Element (Max. 32 characters).
Section address: The section address of the Network Element. (1-128)
NE address: The Network Element address (1-62). Used to identify
Network Elements within a section.
MAC address: The Media Access Control address of the Network
Element. Factory preset (not changeable). Six bytes in hex format
delimited by colon.
NSAP address: The Network Service Access Point address of the
Network Element, used for OSI-Management. Up to 20 bytes in hex
format delimited by colon.
IP address: The Internet Protocol address of the Network Element. Four
bytes in decimal format delimited by period.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
Section and NE addressing:
The combination of Section and NE address uniquely identifies the NE
within a network. This addressing notation was introduced in other Nera
radio-relay product families and is maintained in the InterLink NEs for
network compatibility reasons.
The Section term is used for a combination of equipment that forms a
switching section. It is a relay with Terminals (T) at both ends and none or
more Repeaters (R) in between. The Section address then identifies the
Section while the NE address identifies the NE within the Section. The
figure below shows a typical Nera Management Network:
In a InterLink NE the only address requirement is that the combination of

the Section and NE address forms a unique address within the network.
168
B4029
Operators Guide
2.1.3
Available Functions
Some functions are optional. The optional functions can be ordered from
your Nera equipment supplier. You will then get an encrypted authentication string that can be used for making functions available.
The Available Functions property sheet is used for displaying/configuring
availability of optional functions. To make new functions available, press
the Set button and a dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the
authentication string.

Set button: Displays the Available Functions Authentication dialogue box.
Property page controls: The check-boxes are only for display purposes. To
modify available functions, press the property sheets Set button and enter
the authentication string.
Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC): When checked, ATPC is
available on all transceiver units. ATPC is a function for effectively reducing
interference probabilities. Note that ATPC must be available on both sides
of the hop in order to be used. ATPC is configured from the RF Power property
sheet on the XCVR nodes.
IP stack: When checked, network management is available through TCP/IP.
The IP address is configured from the Element ID property sheet, and other
IP settings and IP Tunnelling can be configured in the Communication Ports
property sheet.
B4029
169
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): When checked, a SNMP
management agent is available.
2.1.4
Notifications
The NE can send notifications to NEW when specific events occur. When
using notifications, NEW gets new information faster than if only polling
is used. Polling should however be used in addition to notifications.
The NE keeps individual notification settings for each NEW that is logged
on to the NE, such that the settings made from one NEW only apply to that
NEW. Please note that the settings will be reset to default when NEW logs
on to the NE or if the supervisory board is reset. All notifications are
enabled by default.
The Notifications property sheet displays/configures enabling of notifications.

170
B4029
Operators Guide
Events:
- Alarm: When checked, the NE sends notifications every time an alarm
is raised or cleared. (The appropriate alarm severity check-box must
also be checked.)
- Security: When checked, the NE sends notifications each time a
configuration setting or security action is made by any NEW-NMS.
Alarm severities: When checked, the NE sends notifications every time
an alarm of the same severity level is raised or cleared. (The Alarm Event
check-box must also be checked).
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.
2.1.5
NE Clock
A real-time clock is used by the NE to set timestamps on alarm and
security events. This clock is also used for managing the collection and
calculation of performance measurements.
NEW-NMS also provides a function for regularly automatically synchronising all detected NEs. See NEW-NMS User Manual.
The NE Clock property sheet displays/configures the NEs clock. Press
the Set button to synchronise the NE clock with the PCs clock. Note that
the NE uses GMT time while the time presented in NEW-NMS is
converted to your PCs local time.
B4029
171

Set button: Sends the PCs clock settings to the Network Element.
The NEs clock: The current date and time of the NE.
Difference from NEW (your PC): The time difference in seconds
between your PC and the NE.
NE.
172
B4029
Operators Guide
2.1.6
Configuration Upload
Uploads configuration data from a NE. The uploaded data can be stored in
a file and/or be downloaded to other NEs immediately. System configuration (as set by the Unit Housekeeping Wizard) and configuration parameters for the different boards/units in the system are included in the
uploaded configuration data, but not Element ID data.
If several Network Elements shall be configured equally (except from
name and addresses), just configure one of them and copy the configuration data to the others. It is also a good idea to upload and save configuration data to a file when installation and configuration of the NE is
completed. It is then easy to recover the configuration of the NE if any
configuration parameters are accidentally changed or if the Supervisory
Board has been replaced.
To upload configuration data, select the Upload Configuration menu
command on the NE node. A Configuration Upload progress dialogue box
is then displayed.
If upload is aborted due to message error or timeout, or if the upload

process is completed, the Cancel button changes name to Close and
the message info symbol stops rotating.
Cancel: Stops the configuration upload process and closes the dialogue box.
Close: Closes the dialogue box.
When Configuration Upload is completed, an Upload Complete dialogue
box is displayed where the user can save the uploaded data to a file or
download the data to other NEs.
B4029
173

Save: Displays a File Save dialogue box where the uploaded data can be
saved to a file.
Download: Displays a NE selection dialogue box where the user can
select which NEs to download the uploaded data to.
If the user selects the Download button, a Download dialogue box is displayed
where the user can select one or more NEs to download the data to.

NE list: Displays all NEs that this data can be downloaded to.
Download: Starts the download process for all NEs selected in the list.
174
B4029
Operators Guide
2.1.7
Downloads configuration data from a file to the NE. System configuration
(as set by the Unit Housekeeping Wizard) and configuration parameters
for the different boards/units in the system are included in the configuration data, but not Element ID data.
To download configuration data, select the Download Configuration menu
command on the NE node. A File Open dialogue box is then displayed
where a configuration file (*.cfg) can be selected.
When a configuration file is selected and opened the download process

starts and a Configuration Download progress dialogue box is displayed.
When download is aborted due to message error or timeout, or when the

download process is completed, the Cancel button changes name to
Close, and the message info symbol stops rotating.
Cancel: Stops the configuration download process and closes the dialogue box.
B4029
175
2.1.8
Restore Configuration
Restores the configuration parameters for the boards/units in the system
to factory defaults. System configuration (as set by the Unit Housekeeping Wizard) and Element ID data are not affected by this action.
To restore configuration data, select the Restore Configuration menu
command on the NE node. A message box is then displayed giving the user
the opportunity to abort the process.
2.1.9
SW Versions
The SU stores SW components used by different boards/units in a nonvolatile FLASH memory. Two memory banks are allocated for each component (except Boot and PLD components). This makes it possible to
download SW to one bank while the other bank is being executed (active).
SW may be downloaded from NEW to several different NEs simultaneously, but only one SW component can be downloaded to each NE at the
same time.
All units/boards of the same type share the same software component. The
SU also makes sure that the equal boards are executing the same version
of the SW. During the boot process of the different boards/units, the SU
checks that the board/unit contains the right version of its application SW
component. It is possible to manually initiate the download process of
application code between the SU and selected boards/units.
The SW Versions property sheet displays the current status of the SW
components stored in the SU and the status of the application code running
on the different boards/units.
176
B4029
Operators Guide
2.1.9.1
Supervisory Board
The Supervisory Board property page displays the SW components stored
in FLASH memory on the Supervisory Board.

List: Displays information about SW components stored in the SU.
- Board/Unit Type: The type of the board/unit where the SW component
is used
- SW Component: The name of the component. This name is provided by
the *.bin file when the component is being downloaded. This name
describes the board/unit that it applies to. For empty memory banks the
SW component text is (empty SW bank).
- Bank: The name of the allocated memory bank.
- Rev.: The version of the component.
- Build Time: The date and time when the SW component were created.
- Status: The current status of the component:
Invalid: The SW component is corrupt or missing.
Idle:
SU app code earlier than R2B00: The SW component is valid but
not executed. Can be activated using the Set Active button.
SU app code R2B00 and above (applies only to non-SU components): The SW component is valid. See Set Active for description on how to execute the SW component.
B4029
177
Active:
SU app code earlier than R2B00: The SW component is currently
executed.
SU app code R2B00 and above (applies only to non-SU components): The SW component is ready for download to specific
boards/units from the Board/Unit page. See o Set Active for
description on how to execute the SW component.
Erasing Flash: A download process has just been started. The old
component is being erased.
Downloading: A download process is running. This status may be
maintained a short period after a download process has been aborted.
Set Active button:
- SU app code earlier than R2B00: Sets the selected bank active on the SU,
downloads and executes the code on all boards/units of selected type.
- SU app code R2B00 and above (applies only to non-SU components):
Sets the selected bank active on the SU. If the selected bank contains
SU application code, the processor starts running the code.
In order to switch the running application code on a single non-SU
board/unit with another code located in one of the SU banks, two steps
are required:
1 The appropriate bank must be set to active using the Set Active
button
2 The code must be downloaded to the desired board/unit from the
Board/Unit page described below.
On download completion, the board/unit will reboot and the new SW
component executed.
Broadcast Download button: Initiates a parellel download of SW components from the selected bank in on the SU to all the boards/units using
the component. (This button only applies to application code for boards/
units, except the SU application code)
2.1.9.2
Board/Unit
The Board/Unit property page displays the status of the running application code on the different boards/units (except from the Supervisory
Board), and the status of download processes from the SU to the different
board/units. (This property page is available from Supervisory Board
application code version R2B00)
178
B4029
Operators Guide

List: Displays information about SW components stored in the SU.
- Board/Unit: The name of the Board/Unit.
- SW Component: The name of the component. This name is provided by
the *.bin file when the component is being downloaded. This name
describes the board/unit that it applies to. For empty memory banks the
SW component text is (empty SW bank).
- Rev.: The version of the component.
- Build Time: The date and time when the SW component was created.
- Status: The current status of the component:
Unknown: The Supervisory Board has lost contact with the board/
unit. This status will also be present a short time after reboot of the
Supervisory Board.
Download Queued...: A download process has been initiated for this
board/unit and will be executed as soon as the other download
processes have been completed.
Erasing Flash...: A download process has just been started. The old
component is being erased.
Downloading from SU...: A download process is being executed Download Completed: The download process has just been completed. This status is only displayed for some seconds before the status
is changed to "running".
Download failed: The download process failed.
Running: The SW component is running. This is the normal situation.
SW revision mismatch with active bank in SU: The revision of the SW
component being executed at the board/unit is different from the
B4029
179
"active" SW component at the SU. (A download process will be
automatically executed if the board/unit is rebooted).
Message Timeout: NEW-NMS has lost contact with the NE.
Download button: Initiates SW download from the corresponding active
bank in the SU to the selected boards/units in the list.
180
B4029
Operators Guide
2.1.10
SW Download
SW components for the different boards/units in the system can be
downloaded from NEW to a nonvolatile FLASH memory in the SU. For
description on how the SU manages the SW components for the different
boards/units in the system, see the SW Versions chapter 2.1.1.9.
To download SW, select the Download SW menu command on the NE
node. A File Open dialogue box is then displayed.
When a SW file is selected in the File Open dialogue box, a new dialogue
box pops up that displays information about the SW component.

Start Download: Starts the download process to the SU.
Cancel: Closes the dialogue box.
Help: Displays help for this dialogue box.
B4029
181
If Start download button is pressed the download process starts, and a
download progress dialogue pops up.
If download is aborted due to message error or timeout, or when the

download process is completed, the Cancel button changes name to
Close and the message info symbol stops rotating. Note that if the
download process is aborted, you have to wait until the NE is ready for a
new download.
Cancel: Stops the configuration download process and closes the
dialogue box.
When download is completed a message box is displayed where the user
can choose whether to start the new SW component or continue executing the old component.
182
B4029
Operators Guide
2.1.11
Remote Reset
If the NE doesnt respond to management commands (Even though the
NEs communication ports are correctly configured), there is a way to
remotely reboot the SU. The SU can be rebooted by the NE across the hop
by inserting a remote reset request into the main traffic.
Note that resetting the SU does not influence the traffic.

Remote NE: Select which NE to reset. The Combo box contains the
name of the NE(s) connected to this NE through DCC Radio. For double
terminals there will be two NEs to select from. (If a NE across the hop
is not detected by NEW-NMS, the name of the NE is presented as
Unknown NE.
Reset button: Resets the selected NE..
Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box
Help Button: Displays help for the dialogue box.
B4029
183
2.2
Equipment Node
The following table describes the configuration functions for the Equipment node.
Context menu:
Menu text
NNP Routing
IP Routing
Communication Ports
Antenna
Frequency
Looping
OSI Settings
2.2.1
Description
Displays the NNP Routing property sheet
Displays the IP Routing property sheet
Displays the Communication Ports property sheet
Displays the Antenna property sheet
Displays the Frequency property sheet
Displays the Looping dialog box
Displays the OSI Settings property sheet
NNP Routing
The active and initial routing tables map incoming messages that are
addressed to other NEs, to different communication ports.
The active routing table is used by the SU to route messages to other NEs,
using the best path detected. The SU regularly searches for connected NEs
through all enabled communication ports to detect any changes in the
network topology. This table is initialised with the initial routing entries
when the SU is rebooted (and when the initial routing table is configured
by the user) and then evolves towards an optimal routing table.
The initial routing table is used after the SU has been booted. This table is
used as a starting point for the routing mechanism, and will thus, if properly
set, decrease the time the NE uses to create a sufficient active routing
table. Initial routing entries can be manually added and active routing
entries can be copied to the initial table.
Active Routing property page:
184
B4029
Operators Guide
Initial Routing property page:

Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element
(Initial Routing only).
List: Contains routing entries.
- Auto/Manual: If Auto, the router may update the entry in the active
routing table automatically based on shortest path/lowest weight. If
Manual, the entry is never changed by the router and fixed route
configuration is used.
- Section: The Section address of the destination NE. Possible values:
1...128.
- NE: The NE address of the destination NE. If this number is 255,
section routing is used. That means that this routing entry is used for
all NEs in the specified section. Possible values: 1...62 (and broadcast
address 255).
B4029
185
- Port: The communication port of which the messages are to be routed

through. Possible values:
NI1
NI2
DCC line 1
DCC line 2
DCC line 3
DCC radio (dir1)
DCC radio (dir2)
OSI TP4 tunnel 1 (Server)
OSI TP4 tunnel 2 (Server)
OSI TP4 tunnel 1 (Client)
OSI TP4 tunnel 2 (Client)
TCP/IP tunnel 1 (Server)
TCP/IP tunnel 2 (Server)
TCP/IP tunnel 1 (Client)
TCP/IP tunnel 2 (Client)
- Weight: A computed weight that gives an indication of the communication capacity to the destination network element. A high number
denotes a longer response time.
Add button: Displays the Add Routing Entry dialogue box where a new
initial routing entry can be configured.
Edit button: Displays the Edit Routing Entry dialogue box where the
selected initial routing entry can be configured.
Delete button: Deletes the selected routing entries.
Add to initial button: Copies the selected routing entries to the initial
routing table.
NE.
The Add Routing Entry and Edit Routing Entry dialogue boxes are similar.
The only difference is that one adds a new entry to the initial routing table,
while the other edits an existing routing entry.
186
B4029
Operators Guide
Dialogue controls:
Section routing: This routing entry is used for all NEs in the specified
section. (NE address is set to the broadcast address 255).
Individual routing: This routing entry is only used for NE specified by
the Section and NE address.
For all other controls, see the description of the list columns in the
property page description.
B4029
187
2.2.2
IP Routing
Static Routes
Maximum 20 static routes can be configured on a Nera OSPF router.
Active Routes
An Nera OSPF router supports approximately 200 active routes.
OSPF areas
It is not recomended to have more than 25 OSPF routers per OSPF area.
Each area may export up to 8 address ranges.
Fixed configuration options
The Nera OSPF implementation is not a dedicated router implementation and
as such some parameters that would normally be configurable are fixed. For
interoperability with other equipment it is however sometimes important that
the configuration of external equipment match these values.
Name
Inject default route into stub area
Router dead interval
Hello interval
Retransmit delay
Retransmit interval
Authentication
Value
YES
40 sec
10 sec
1 sec
5 sec
NO
Limitations
This implementation supports a basic implementation of OSPF v.2 (RFC
2823). It does not support virtual links and MD5 authentication.
Other options
This implementation supports a rudimentary mechanism for distribution of
static and RIP2 routes. The implementation also supports exporting routes
to RIP2.
188
B4029
Operators Guide
2.2.2.1
General Settings
The general settings page allows the user to control the general use of the
OSPF and RIP 2 protocols for the selected NE. Enabling of protocols on
specific interfaces are performed in the Rip Interfaces and OSPF Interfaces property pages.

Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element.
Close button: Closes the property sheet.
Help button: Displays help for active page.
B4029
189
OSPF Protocol:
Select parameter settings for OSPF routing protocol.
- Enable: Enables the NE to handle OSPF routing.
- Redistribute RIP: Allows OSPF to redistribute routing information
from RIP v2 routing protocol.
- Redistribute Static: Allows OSPF to redistribute static routing information.
- Default Cost: Setting of default cost value used for OSPF protocol.
The Redistribute options allow the OSPF protocol to pass the routing
information of other routing protocols.
For information to be passed between the OSPF and RIP protocols, the
current NE must have both protocols enabled.
RIP Protocol: Select parameter settings for RIP routing protocol.
- Enable: Enables the NE to handle RIP routing.
- Redistribute OSPF: Allows RIP to redistribute routing information
from OSPF routing protocol.
- Redistribute Static: Allows RIP to redistribute static routing information.
- Default Metric: Setting of default metric value used for RIP protocol.
The Redistribute options allow the RIP protocol to pass the routing
information of other routing protocols.
For information to be passed between the OSPF and RIP protocols, the
current NE must have both protocols enabled.
IP Configurable Interfaces: List of interfaces available on the current NE
for the OSPF and RIP protocols (IP enabled interfaces)
Interfaces may be enabled for IP in the Communication Ports page for the
specific interface (e.g. NI interface on InterLink).
190
B4029
Operators Guide
2.2.2.2
Active Routes
Monitor active routes for current NE from this page.

B4029
191
2.2.2.3
Static Routes
Edit static routes regarding IP Routing using this page.

Add: Add a new static route to the list using the appearing dialogue.
Edit: Select a row and press "Edit" to open the "Edit Static Route"
dialogue. In this dialogue the settings for the selected route may be
changed.
Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list.
Note!
192
Changes to the static routes are not transferred to the NE before "Set" is
pressed.
B4029
Operators Guide
Route States
The static routes have three possible states;
Active
Invalid
Unreachable
In order to indicate the state of each route, a colour scheme has been applied.
Each static route in the list has a font colour according to its state. The table
below shows the relation between the different font colours used and the
static route states.
State
Active
Invalid
Unreachable
2.2.2.3.1
Font color
black
red
blue
"Add Static Route" and "Edit Static Route" dialogues

The "Add Static Route" and "Edit Static Route" dialogues may be opened
from the "Static Routes" page.
The dialogues are identical, but are handled differently; the "Add" dialogue
adds new static routes and the "Edit" dialogue edits existing static routes.
A maximum of 20 static routes are allowed for each NE.
B4029
193
Dialogue controls:
Destination: IP address of the destination for current static route.
Note! The IP address must be valid for the given subnet mask entered
below.
Mask: Subnet mask for current static route.
Note! The subnet mask must be continuous.
Gateway: IP address of the gateway through which the current static route
may be reached.
Interface Id: Interface used by the static route.
Metric: Interface metric.
Possible values: 0 - 15.
2.2.2.4
RIP Interfaces
Edit RIP Interfaces for current NE from this page.
Note!
194
In order to edit the "RIP areas" settings, the RIP protocol must be disabled
in the General Settings page.
B4029
Operators Guide

Add: Add a new RIP interface to the list using the appearing dialogue.
Edit: Select a row and press Edit to open the Edit RIP Interface dialogue.
In this dialogue the settings for the selected interface may be changed.
Note!
B4029
Changes to the RIP interfaces are not transferred to the NE before Set is
pressed.
195
2.2.2.4.1
"Add RIP Interface" and "Edit RIP Interface" dialogues

The "Add RIP Interface" and "Edit RIP Interface" dialogues may be opened
from the "RIP Interfaces" page.
The dialogues are identical, but are handled differently; the "Add" dialogue adds new RIP interfaces and the "Edit" dialogue edits existing RIP
interfaces.
A maximum of 8 interfaces are allowed for each NE.
Dialogue controls:
Interface Id: Id of an interface which handles RIP protocol traffic.
Metric: Interface metric.
Default Route Metric: Metric assigned to imported default route.
0 = No default gateway.
196
B4029
Operators Guide
2.2.2.5
OSPF Interfaces
Edit OSPF Interfaces for current NE from this page.
Note!
In order to edit the OSPF areas settings, the OSPF protocol must be
disabled in the General Settings page.

Add: Add a new OSPF interface to the list using the appearing dialogue.
Edit: Select a row and press Edit to open the Edit OSPF Interface
dialogue. In this dialogue the settings for the selected interface may be
changed.
Note!
B4029
Changes to the OSPF interfaces are not transferred to the NE before Set
is pressed.
197
2.2.2.5.1
"Add OSPF Interface" and "Edit OSPF Interface" dialogues

The "Add OSPF Interface" and "Edit OSPF Interface" dialogues may be
opened from the "OSPF Interfaces" page.
The dialogues are identical, but are handled differently; the "Add" dialogue
adds new OSPF interfaces and the "Edit" dialogue edits existing OSPF
interfaces.
A maximum of 8 interfaces are allowed for each NE.
Dialogue controls:
Interface Id: Id of an interface which handles OSPF protocol traffic.
Cost: An indication of the overhead required to send packets across
current interface.
- Possible values: 0 - 65535.
Transmit Delay: The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a
Link State Update Packet over current interface.
- Default value is 1 second.
Area Id: Identifies the OSPF area the current interface is part of.
Designated Router Priority: Indicates the current NEs reliability as a
designated router (DR). Higher values = higher reliability.
- 0 = cannot be DR.
198
B4029
Operators Guide
2.2.2.6
OSPF Areas
Edit settings for OSPF areas for current NE from this page.
Note!
In order to edit the OSPF areas settings, the OSPF protocol must be
disabled in the General Settings page.

B4029
199
Add:Add a new OSPF area to the list using the appearing dialogue.
Note! Use "Edit" dialogue to add new network ranges to existing areas.
Edit: Select a row and press "Edit" to open the "Edit OSPF Area" dialogue.
In this dialogue the settings for the area which the row belongs to may
be changed.
If a network range row is selected, only the network range is deleted. In
all other cases, the entire area is deleted.
Note!
Changes to the OSPF areas are not transferred to the NE before Set is
pressed.
2.2.2.6.1
"Add OSPF Area" and "Edit OSPF Area" dialogues

The "Add OSPF Area" and "Edit OSPF Area" dialogues may be opened from
the "OSPF Areas" page.
The dialogues are almost identical, but are handled differently. The main
differences are as follows:
"Add OSPF Area" Add new areas
Add network ranges to new areas
"Edit OSPF Area" Edit existing areas
Add network ranges to existing areas
A maximum of 4 areas are allowed for each NE.
200
B4029
Operators Guide
Dialogue controls:
Area Id: Identifies the current area.
Cost: Default cost for the current area.
Stub Area: When this checkbox is set, the current area is configured as a
stub network.
Add: Opens the "Add OSPF Area Network Range" dialogue. Allows the
user to add new network ranges to the current area.
Edit: Opens the "Edit OSPF Area Network Range" dialogue. Allows the
user to edit existing network ranges for the current area.
Delete: Deletes the selected network range(s) from the list.
2.2.2.6.2
"Add OSPF Area Network Range" and "Edit OSPF Area

Network Range" dialogues
The "Add OSPF Area Network Range" and "Edit OSPF Area Network
Range" dialogues may be opened from the "Add OSPF Area" and "Edit
OSPF Area" dialogues. The network range dialogues are handled similarly
to the "Add OSPF Area" and "Edit OSPF Area" dialogues:
"Add OSPF Area Network Range" Add new network range to current
area
"Edit OSPF Area Network Range" Edit existing network range in current area
A maximum of 8 network ranges are allowed for each OSPF area.
B4029
201
Dialogue controls:
IP Network Address: Enter the IP network address.
Note! The IP network address must be valid for the given network mask
entered below.
Mask: Enter the network mask.
Note! The network mask must be continuous.
Advertise: When this checkbox is set, the information regarding this
network range is advertised.
Range Cost: An indication of the overhead required to send packets
across the current network range.
202
B4029
Operators Guide
2.2.3
Communication Ports
The communication ports are different interfaces for interconnecting
different NEs to form a management network. The communication ports
also include interfaces for LCT.
DCC Property Page:
The DCC ports are used to interconnect Network Elements through the
SOH of the SDH traffic. In the Line direction up to three different
management communication channels can be used while one DCC channel
can be used for each Radio direction.
B4029
203
Enabled: If checked, the DCC port is enabled (management traffic is
inserted into the SOH of the traffic). Always enabled in Radio
direction(s).
Channel: The traffic channel where the DCC is inserted. The value range
is limited by the system configuration:
- Line directions: P, 1N, where N is the number of regular channels.
Ch.P is only selectable if LPT is present in the selected direction.
- Radio directions: P and 1.
Direction: The traffic direction where the DCC is inserted. The value
range is limited by the system configuration. For DCC Line, the
direction is only selectable when the channel is a double terminal where
the user may select Line (dir1) or Line (dir2).
SOH byte: The SOH byte used for this DCC. If pressing the SOH button,
a SOH byte Selection dialogue box is displayed.
Stack: Which communication protocol to use:
- Nera: Proprietary. Always enabled in Radio direction(s).
- QECC: QECC Stack (Available from Supervisory Board application
code version R2B00). LAPD is the data link layer of the QECC
protocol. For more information refer to ITU-T G.784 and ITU-T
Q.921.
User Side: Client for the LAPD requests.
Network Side: Server for the LAPD requests.
- TCP/IP: TCP/IP Stack (Available from Supervisory Board application
code version R2B00).
NI Property Page:
The NI ports are used for interconnection of Network Elements through
electrical cables. The NI ports can also be used for connection to a LCT
(Function=Q1 V.11 and a RS422/V.11 to RS232C/V.24 converter must be
used).
204
B4029
Operators Guide

Enabled: If checked, the NI port is enabled.
Function: Various functions are available to connect this NE to different
interfaces of other NEs (or LCT). Possible selections:
- CityLink/InterLink: Available baud rates: 1200, 9600, 19200, 28800,
33600, 38400, 57600, 64000, 115200, 200000.
- NL29x NI: Available baud rate: 200000. Nera stack only.
- NL29x Qx: Available baud rates: 1200, 9600, 19200, 28800, 33600,
38400, 57600, 64000. Nera stack only.
- PDH synchronous: Available baud rate: 9600. Nera stack only.
- PDH asynchronous: Available baud rates: 1200 and 9600. Nera stack
only.
- V.11 contra dir slave: Receiving clock signal.
- V.11 contra dir master: Sending clock signal.
- Q1 V.11: Available baud rates: 1200, 9600, 19200, 28800, 33600,
38400, 57600, 115200, 200000. Nera stack only.
- NL29x V.11 contra dir slave: Receiving clock signal. Nera stack
only.
Baud rate: The number of bits transferred per second. Selectable values
depend on selected function.
B4029
205
Stack: Which communication protocol to use:
- Nera: Proprietary.
- QECC: QECC Stack (Available from Supervisory Board application code
version R2B00). LAPD is the data link layer of the QECC protocol. For
more information refer to ITU-T G.784 and ITU-T Q.921.
User Side: Client for the LAPD requests.
Network Side: Server for the LAPD requests.
- TCP/IP: TCP/IP Stack (Available from Supervisory Board application
LCT Property Page:
The LCT ports are used for connection of the NE to a NEW-NMS through
a null modem cable. There are two connection ports for serial communication:
LCT port on the Connection Panel.
LCT port on the Alarm Display & Relay Board.
Only the baud rate is configurable. The other port settings are fixed:
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
206
B4029
Operators Guide
Baud rate: The number of bits transferred per second. Possible Values:
1200, 9600, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200.
Ethernet Property Page:
The internal Ethernet adapter is used to connect the NE to a LAN/WAN
network.

Enabled: When checked, the Ethernet adapter is enabled. Note that an IP
or NSAP address must be configured before the Ethernet port can be
used. [See the Element ID property page].
Stack:
- TCP/IP: IP address must be configured in the Element ID property
sheet before this stack can be used.
- OSI TP4: OSI stack (Available from Supervisory Board application
B4029
207
IP Settings Property Page:
Subnet mask and default gateway for the Internet Protocol can be configured in the IP Settings property sheet. The IP address can be set in the
Element ID property sheet.

IP address: The IP address of this NE. Use the Element ID property sheet
to configure this address.
Subnet mask: This number, combined with the IP address, identifies
which network your Network Element is on. The Subnet Mask number
should be provided by your network administrator.
Default gateway: This address is required for nodes on inter-networks.
It is used by the Ethernet adapter to forward packets to other networks
or subnets. If this address is not provided, IP functionality will be limited
to the local subnet unless a route is specified with the TCP/IP route
command. The Default Gateway address should be provided by the
network administrator.
208
B4029
Operators Guide
IP Tunnelling Property Page:
A connection can be set up between two Network Elements, through
another network, using the Internet Protocol. This is called IP Tunnelling.
Two connections, IP Tunnel 1 and IP Tunnel 2, can be configured. Ethernet
must be enabled with TCP/IP Stack in order to use IP tunnels.
The IP tunnel must only be configured at one side of the tunnel, the client
side. The other side will then be the server side.

Enabled: When checked, IP tunnelling is enabled.
Remote section address: The section address of the Network Element
on the other side of the tunnel. This number will be automatically
detected by the NE.
Remote NE address: The NE address of the Network Element on the
other side of the tunnel. This number will be automatically detected by
the NE.
Remote IP address: The IP address of the Network Element on the other
side of the tunnel.
B4029
209
OSI Tunnelling Property Page:
A connection can be set up between two Network Elements, through
another network, using the OSI Protocol. This is called OSI TP4 Tunnelling. Two connections, OSI TP4 Tunnel 1 and OSI TP4 Tunnel 2, can be
configured. Ethernet must be enabled with OSI TP4 Stack in order to use
OSI TP4 tunnels.
The OSI TP4 tunnel must only be configured at one side of the tunnel, the
client side. The other side will then be the server side.

Enabled: When checked, OSI TP4 tunnelling is enabled.
Remote section address: The section address of the Network Element on
the other side of the tunnel. This number will be automatically detected by
the NE.
Remote NE address: The NE address of the Network Element on the
other side of the tunnel. This number will be automatically detected by
the NE.
Remote NSAP address: The NSAP address of the Network Element on
the other side of the tunnel.
210
B4029
Operators Guide
2.2.4
Antenna
The antenna property sheet displays antenna parameters that are stored in the NE.
These parameters must be initially configured from NEW. (The parameters cannot
be read from the hardware). To change the antenna parameters, select a different
Antenna code from the combo box. Available antenna codes and their parameters
are stored in a table in your database. If your antenna code cannot be found in the
combo box, please contact Nera for upgrading the database table.

Help Button: Displays help for active page
Antenna code: Uniquely identifies the antenna type.
Gain: The antenna gain. A measurement of the antennas ability to transform
electrical signals to electromagnetic waves.
Diameter: The diameter of the antenna.
Polarization: Single or double.
Front/Back ratio: Ratio between the Gain in forward direction and Gain in
backward direction.
Frequency range: The frequency range where the antenna can be expected
to operate successfully.
B4029
211
2.2.5
Frequency
The Frequency property sheet displays the frequency settings for all
transceiver units in the same antenna direction. For system configurations
that have two antenna directions, there are two menu commands (one for
each antenna direction).
Available frequency plans and their parameters are stored in a table in your
database. If the wanted frequency plan cannot be found in the combo box,
please contact Nera for upgrading the database table. When frequency data
is retrieved from the NE, the data are matched against frequency plans
stored in your database system. If a match is found the appropriate
frequency plan is selected, otherwise a frequency plan can be selected
from the combo box.
To change the frequencies:
1 Select a frequency plan from the combo box.
2 Select the polarization system from the combo box.
3 For each STM-1 channel, select frequencies:
3.1 Select the channel in the Channel settings list.
3.2 Select a TX frequency by pressing a button in the frequency plan.
The RX frequency is calculated from the TX frequency and the
duplex distance. The selected frequency should be within the band
of the corresponding TX and RX filter as displayed in the Channel
settings list.
3.3 Appropriate TX and RX compensation filters will be automatically
selected by NEW when the frequency is changed. This setting may
be manually overrided by double-clicking in the TX or RX Compensation Filter column in the Channel settings list.
4 Send the new settings to the NE. (Press the Set button in the property
sheet)
5 Examine the status column in the channel list:
5.1 If a Transceiver Unit needs DRO tuning, open the DRO Tuning
property sheet on the corresponding Transceiver Unit node and
follow the DRO Tuning procedures.
5.2 If a Transceiver Unit claims to have invalid branching filter, replace
the branching filter.
Frequency settings for individual transceivers can also be displayed from
the Frequency menu command on the XMTR Unit node.
212
B4029
Operators Guide

Selected plan: The currently selected frequency plan. The graphical presentation of the plan contains channel buttons that can be used to set the RX
and TX frequencies for the selected channel in the list. Red vertical lines
show the RX and TX frequencies for the selected channel.
Polarization system: The polarization settings of the system. This
selection is used to determine appropriate compensation filter settings
- ACAP (Adjacent Channel Alternating Polarization): Neighbour channels are using opposite polarization.
- ACCP (Adjacent Channel Co-Polarization): Neighbour channels are
using the same polarization.
- CCDP (Co-Channel Dual Polarization): Two transceivers are using
the same frequency but opposite polarization.
Modulation: modulation method: 32TCM, 64TCM or 128TCM.
Data rate: STM-1 or STM-0.
Channel spacing: The distance in MHz between two consecutive channels.
B4029
213
Duplex distance: The distance between the Transmitter and Receiver frequencies.
Innermost spacing: The distance between the highest frequency in lower half
and the lowest frequency in the upper half of the frequency plan.
Channel settings:
- Channel: The number of the channel.
- Status: Transceiver status:
OK: Tuning and branching filters are OK.
Need TX DRO tuning: Open the DRO tuning dialogue box and follow the
instructions.
Need RX DRO tuning: Open the DRO tuning dialogue box and follow the
instructions.
TX branching filter invalid: Replace the filter.
RX branching filter invalid: Replace the filter.
- TX: The Transmitter frequency.
- RX: The Receiver frequency.
- TX Compensation filter: Selection of TX compensation filter mode. The
digital filters in the Modem Board compensates for RF Filter and
branching characteristics. Different filter settings are stored in the
database system for each frequency plan. (Possible selections are
limited by the selected polarization system):
ACAP Normal: The default filter for ACAP systems. No special
consideration for innermost channels.
ACAP Innermost: Innermost channels using the same polarization
needs a different compensation-filtering due to low innermost spacing.
ACCP/CCDP N: Narrow compensation filter used regardless of
neighbour channels on the same polarization.
ACCP/CCDP NNN: Narrow compensation filter used when there are
neighbour channels on both sides (on the same polarization).
ACCP/CCDP XNN: Narrow compensation filter used when there is a
neighbour channel on the right side (on the same polarization).
ACCP/CCDP NNX: Narrow compensation filter used when there is a
neighbour channel on the left side (on the same polarization).
ACCP/CCDP XNX: Narrow compensation filter used when there are
no neighbour channels on any side (on the same polarization).
ACCP/CCDP XWX: Wide compensation filter used when there are
no neighbour channels on any side (on the same polarization).
- RX Compensation filter: Selection of RX compensation filter mode.
(See description of TX compensation)
- TX Filter: Centre frequency and bandwidth of the TX branching filter
- RX Filter: Centre frequency and bandwidth of the RX branching filter
- TX Band: The TX frequency band supported by the Transceiver.
- RX Band: The RX frequency band supported by the Transceiver.
- TX LO synth.: Last calibrated LO TX frequency.
- RX LO synth.: Last calibrated LO RX frequency.
214
B4029
Operators Guide
2.2.6
Looping
Different looping functions are provided as a powerful tool for testing
different system modules.
Available Loops:
Interface Board:
- Baseband Line Near End Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to
the Line output. This loop tests the line input/output circuitry.
- Baseband Near End Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the
Line output. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface Board.
- Baseband Far End Loop: The Radio input signal from the remote
element is looped back to the Radio output. This loop tests the
functionality of the Interface Board, Modem Board and Transceiver
Unit on this element in addition to the hop and the remote element.
Modem Board:
- Modem Near End IF Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the
Line output. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface and
Modem Board.
- Modem Far End Loop: The Radio input signal from the remote
element is looped back to the Radio output. This loop tests the
functionality of the Modem Board and Transceiver Unit on this
element and the remote element.
Transceiver Unit:
- Transceiver Near End RF Loop: The Line input signal is looped back
to the Line output. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface
Board, Modem Board and Transceiver Unit, including the RF circuitry
on the Transceiver Unit. Branching and channel filters are not included
in the loop. Note that this loop terminates the RF XMTR signal to the
remote element.
The Looping dialogue box displays main traffic loops for all channels in
the NE. Loops can be toggled on/off by using the loop buttons. When
activating a loop, a Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed where the user
must enter the time period that the loop shall be active. Activating a loop
may disconnect NEW from the NE. (Deactivating the loop manually may
not be possible).
Only one main loop can be active for each channel at the same time. When
activating a loop, the NE will automatically deactivate any other active loops
on the same channel. This is to prevent the user from setting circular loops.
For protected systems (N+1 or HSB) status lines displays the traffic flow and
the current switch status.
The loops can also be displayed from the individual boards/unit nodes. This
property sheet can be displayed by double clicking on the board/unit
objects in this dialogue box.
All loops are cleared if the Supervisory Board is reset. (The Remote Reset
function can be used to clear the loops if NEW has lost contact with the NE)
Note that the dialogue box is resizable.
B4029
215

Close button: Closes the dialogue box
Help button: Displays help.
Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates which
way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes the
status of the loop:
- Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has not
been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the
NE and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop
settings have not been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot
be toggled when the status is unknown.
- Black: The loop is off (inactive)
- Red: The loop is on (active)
Loops will be automatically cleared after: Displays the time of which all
main traffic loops in the NE will be cleared. This time is set by the user
when activating a loop.
NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 second interval) as long as this
dialogue box is open.
216
B4029
Operators Guide
Loop Timer dialogue box:
The Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed when activating a loop.
Clear all loops: Selects the time period that the loop will be active.
OK button: Sends an activate loop request to the Network Element using
the selected time period settings.
Cancel button: Closes this dialogue box. The loop setting is aborted.
2.2.7
OSI Settings
The OSI configuration has to be set to get OSI-traffic on your LAN routed
through the Nera-network. (OSI Settings are available from Supervisory
Board application code version R2B00).
B4029
217
Parameters Property Page:
The Parameters property page displays/configures the OSI parameters for
the different communication ports. (OSI stack must be enabled in the
Communication Ports property sheet in order to be used for a specific
port).

NSAP Address:
- Area ID: Subnet address.
- Host ID: End system address.
- End Selector: Type of service. Always 01.
IS link state send buffer state: Transmitted buffer length size of IS hellopackets (512-1492 bytes). (Applies to all channels).
Parameters:
- MTU Size: Maximum Transmission Unit size (512-1492 bytes).
- Default Metric: Cost of path.
- LAPD Role: Client/Server role. The two ends of a communications
line must be configured with the opposite roles in order to communicate!.
- OSI Enabled: If checked, OSI stack is enabled for the corresponding
communication port. (See the Communication Ports property sheet).
NE.
218
B4029
Operators Guide
Routing Table Property Page:
The Routing property page displays the Host ID and Metric for all OSI
routing entries.

List:
- Host ID: End system address.
- Metric: Cost of path.
B4029
219
Interface Information Property Page:
The Interface Information property page displays a summary of the OSI
settings for the different communication ports

List: Displays information of the communication ports where OSI stack
is enabled
- Id: Port identifier.
- Interface Name: Name of the communication port
- Media: Type of communication media.
- Status:
- MTU Size: Maximum Transmission Unit size (512-1492 bytes).
NE.
220
B4029
Operators Guide
2.3
Supervisory Board Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the Supervisory Board node.
Context menu:
Menu text
Switch Configuration
Manual Switch Control
Diagnose
Production Data
2.3.1
Description
Displays the Switch Configuration property sheet
Displays the Manual Switch Control property sheet
Displays the Diagnose property sheet
Displays the Production Data property sheet
Protection Switching
Radio Protection Switching (RPS) operations for N+1and Hot Stand-by
systems are managed by a dedicated module on the Supervisory Board.
This RPS module interacts with other system hardware resources to
achieve automatic protection switch operations based on switch criteria
inputs from the individual radio channels. This module also supports
manually controlled switch operations and status reporting. The RPS
functions can be configured and controlled by NEW.
2.3.1.1
Switch Section
N+1 system configurations define a single traffic direction over a single
radio hop as a protection switch section (future configurations may
include multiple-hop sections). A dedicated RF channel, denoted protection channel (Ch. P), serves as a backup for a number of traffic channels,
denoted regular channels. The state of a regular channel is either
regular or protected. A channel is in protected state when its traffic is
carried over the hop by the protection RF channel, otherwise it is in regular
state (the traffic is carried over the hop by its own dedicated RF channel).
The RPS module in a N+1 switch section is based on a Master/Slave
philosophy. The Master is located at the receive end of the hop, and has the
overall responsibility for acquiring the necessary system status information and controlling how and when a protection switchover shall be
executed. The Slave is located at the transmit side of the hop and will
execute actions requested by the remote-end Master. A typical action
requested is to set up the remote TX bridge for a specific channel. The
remote TX bridge is the signal duplication route from the traffic input port
of a regular channel to the Ch. P transmit path. The Master and Slave
communicate over the hop through the RPS order-wire channel, using a
SOH byte in the SOH frame (MS1 or MS2).
Hot Stand-by system configurations implement local equipment protection within the network element (radio station). A protection switch
section is then comprised of the duplicated transmit- and receive-equip-
B4029
221
ment required to serve one antenna. This switch section is monitored and
controlled by a single RPS module. The two equipment paths are identified
as Ch. 1 and Ch. 2. The protection switch state is either Ch. 1 active or
Ch. 2 active. Each traffic direction (transmit and receive) has its own set
of switch criteria and its own physical switch arrangement. The system
may be set up as Unidirectional (radio transmit switch and baseband
receive switch operates completely independent of one another) or Bidirectional (radio transmit switch will follow the baseband receive
switch if there is no conflicting criteria, and vice versa).
Hot Stand-by Dual Baseband system configurations implements local
equipment protection for the transmit traffic direction only. In this system
configuration the received signal is duplicated through the entire equipment. (There is one Interface Baseband Board for each channel). Protection switching of the received signal must be performed by external
equipment.
2.3.1.2
Switch Criteria
Automatic switch operations are initiated based on a set of switch criteria.
Automatic switch criteria are individual or collections of alarms and
indicators generated by the different boards/units within the switch section.
The switch criteria are grouped into a Quality group and a Continuity
group. The Quality type of criteria will request error-free (aligned)
switchover while the Continuity type of criteria will request unconditional
(forced) switchover.
Quality criteria:
Low RF input level (Low RF): Originates in the Transceiver Unit and
indicates that the input signal level has fallen below a specific threshold.
Early Warning (EW): Originates in the Modem board and indicates that
the estimated error ratio (calculated by the demodulator signal processing) is above a specific threshold [See the BER Thresholds property
sheet]. (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations)
Low BER (LBER): Originates in the Modem board and indicates that the
estimated error ratio (calculated by the demodulator signal processing)
is above a specific threshold [See the BER Thresholds property
Continuity criteria:
High BER (HBER): Originates in the Modem Board and indicates that
the estimated error ratio (calculated by the demodulator signal processing) is above a specific threshold [See the BER Thresholds property
222
B4029
Operators Guide
Sync loss (OOS): Originates in the Modem Board and indicates that either
the internal OOF alarm or the internal RF_ID alarm has been asserted. (Not
used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations)
Modem Board TX alarm: Indicates failure in the data signal connection
between the Interface Baseband Board from which the data originates
and the Modem Board, or in the input circuitry of the Modem Board.
(N+1 system configurations only).
Interface regular port input alarm: Originates in the Interface Baseband
Board and serves as RX data input alarm for the regular input port. (Not
used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations)
Modem Board absent alarm: Empty slot is detected in the Modem
Boards slot position.
Interface Baseband Board absent alarm: Empty slot is detected in the
Interface Baseband Boards slot position.
In addition to switch criteria there are some equipment alarms related to the
channels ability to serve traffic. If one or more of these alarms are raised the
channel is not able to transmit/receive the signal even if it is protected, so
no attempt will be made to protect it:
Protectability criteria:
Interface protection port input alarm: Originates in the Interface Baseband Board and serves as RX data input alarm for the input protection
port. (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations)
Interface Baseband Board TX alarm: (N+1 system configurations only).
- Terminal system configuration: Indicates missing input signal (tributary side).
- Add/Drop Repeater system configuration: Indicates failure in the data
signal connection between the Interface Baseband Board and the
Modem board from which the data originates or in the input circuitry
of the Interface Baseband Board.
Some indicators are used in addition to the switch criteria to validate the
switch operation:
Indicators:
Alignment indicator: Indicates that the data alignment function has
detected identical data streams on the protection channel and regular
channel, and is capable of doing an error-free (aligned) switchover.
(N+1 system configurations only).
Transceiver state indicator: Indicates whether a radio transmitter is
active or passive (Hot Stand-by system configurations only).
B4029
223
2.3.1.3
N+1 Systems
Switch system: 2+1 with LPT (Channel 2 is currently using protection)
Transceiver
Modem BD
Transceiver
Out
ChP
Interface BB BD P
Modem BD
Interface BB BD P
Transceiver
Modem BD
Branching
Branching
Transceiver
Ch1
Out
RCVR
BUS
Transceiver
Transceiver
Modem BD
Ch2
Modem BD
Inp
Ch1
Interface BB BD 2
Interface BB BD 2
Out
ChP
Interface BB BD 1
Modem BD
Interface BB BD 1
Inp
Inp
Ch2
XMTR
BUS
Transmit side:
If one of the regular channels is using the protection channel:
- The Interface Baseband Board of the protected channel duplicates its
signal on output port P (Input Selector of Modem Board Ch. P is fixed
in position P).
If no channel is using protection we will have one of the following
scenarios (configuration dependent):
- The Interface Baseband Board of the channel which most recently
used protection continues to duplicate its signal on output port P.
- The Interface Baseband Board of another (configurable) channel
duplicates its signal on output port P.
- LPT on protection: The Ch. P Interface Baseband Board drives its
signal on output port P.
Receive side:
If one of the regular channels is using the protection channel:
- The Interface Baseband Board Input Selector of the protected channel
is switched to position P.
- The Input Selectors of all other channels are in position R.
If no channel is using protection:
- The Input Selectors of all channels are in position R.
If configuration allows LPT on protection: The Ch. P Interface Baseband
Board transmits LPT on its RX output port.
224
B4029
Operators Guide
Automatic switch/restore:
The RPS system can automatically perform unidirectional (RX) switch
and restore operation based on detected error conditions. The following
scenarios describe the basic principles of operation:
If a channel N is protectable and its error conditions has been evaluated
to a level above or equal to the switch limit, the RPS checks if any other
protectable channel has more severe error conditions (a more significant need for being protected). If not, the error conditions of the
protection channel is compared with the error conditions of channel N.
If the error conditions of channel N is worse, an automatic protection of
channel N is performed.
If channel N is using protection and its error conditions are still above
or equal to the restore limit but another channel now has worse conditions than channel N, an automatic restore of channel N is performed
followed by an automatic protection of the other channel.
If channel N is using protection and its error conditions are still above
or equal to the restore limit but the protection channel now has worse
conditions than channel N, an automatic restore of channel N is performed.
If channel N is using protection and its error conditions have been
evaluated to a level below the restore limit and the RPS configuration is
revertive, an automatic restore of channel N is performed. If nonrevertive no action is taken.
If an automatic switch request is rejected (due to alignment timeout or
equipment related problems), the operation is retried repeatedly until
the request is acknowledged or cancelled. An automatic switch request
can be cancelled due to changes in error conditions, change in RPS
configuration, manual switch requests or manual switch request.
Manual switch/restore:
Unidirectional (RX) manual switching can be requested from NEW. The
different manual switch modes are described in the Manual Switch Control property sheet.
B4029
225
2.3.1.4
The Switch Configuration property sheet displays/configures the protection switching system. There is one property sheet for each switch section.
Section:
The Section property page displays/configures RPS settings for the switch
section.

Protection system:
- Disabled: Protection system is disabled. All channels are locked in their
regular state. No automatic or manual switch operations can be performed.
- Enabled: N+1 frequency diversity protection is enabled.
Switch mode:
- Revertive: A channel that is currently protected will be restored to its
regular channel if its switch conditions ceases.
226
B4029
Operators Guide
B4029
- Non-revertive: A channel that is currently protected will not be restored to

its regular channel if its switch conditions ceases, unless another channel
requests protection.
Low Priority Traffic (LPT): If the protection channel contains an Interface
Baseband Board the system can offer Low Priority Traffic, which is
available when no regular channel is using the protection channel (available
only if switch mode is revertive). This setting controls what signal to
transmit on the LPT output port.
- Disabled: MS-AIS is transmitted on the LPT output port.
- Enabled: Any traffic received via the protection channel is unconditionally transmitted on the LPT output port.
- Auto: If the protection channel carries LPT (i.e. none of the regular channels
are using the protection channel and remote TX bridge state is LPT), its
traffic is transmitted on the LPT output port. Otherwise MS-AIS is
transmitted on the LPT port.
High priority channel: If a channel is selected as High Priority Channel it will
have an associated Intrusion Limit which defines the degradation at which
this channel always is given protection, no matter what conditions may exist
on any other regular channel.
- Channel: Possible values: none, 1N.
- Intrusion limit: If the degradation level of the high priority channel exceeds
this limit it will always get protection (unless Ch. P is more degraded).
Possible values: Low RF, EW, LBER, HBER, OOS.
Remote TX bridge: This property defines the state of the remote TX bridge
when no regular channel is using the protection channel. The channel
bridged on TX side will achieve the same protection switch performance
as it would in a 1+1 system (shorter switch operation time).
- Mode: (always revertive and Ch. P if LPT is enabled or auto).
Revertive: When no channel requires protection the TX bridge will
revert to the channel specified by the Revert to Ch property (this
channels traffic will be duplicated on the protection channel).
Non-revertive: The regular channel which most recently has been
protected keeps its bridge on TX side (the TX bridge is left unchanged
when the channel reverts to its regular state at RX side). This enables
prepared switching of the channel most recently protected as long as
no other channel needs to be protected.
- Revert to Ch.: In revertive mode it controls which channel to be bridged
on TX side while no switch requests exist. Unavailable in non-revertive
mode.
227
Channel:
The Channel property page displays/configures RPS settings for individual
channels.

Channel configuration: The list contains individual settings for each channel.
To edit data in the list double-click with the left mouse-button in the
appropriate cell.
- Priority: The switching priority of the channel (higher value means higher
priority). The need for protection takes precedence over channel priority
(i.e. only when two or more channels have equal error conditions they will
be protected according to priority). A channel that has priority 0 is
unprotected and will never be switched. Setting priority to 0 for Ch. P will
disable the protection switch system completely (possible values for
regular channels: 0N, where N is the number of regular channels. Possible
values for protection channel: 0 and 1).
- Switch limit: If the error conditions of a channels received signal gets equal
to or greater than this limit, this channel requests to use the protection
channel. (Not applicable for Ch. P).
- Restore limit: If the error conditions of the received signal of a channel
currently using the protection channel falls below this limit, the channel
will be restored to its active state. (Not applicable for Ch. P).
- Alignment timeout (ms): If an aligned switch/restore operation is
requested and alignment of the regular channel and protection channel is
not achieved within this time limit, the switch/restore operation is
aborted. (Not applicable for Ch. P).
228
B4029
Operators Guide
2.3.1.5

The Manual Switch Control property sheet displays the current switch
status and also provides a button for manual switching/restoring.
Section status property page:

RX Channel using protection (local): The channel that is currently using
the protection channel.
Remote TX bridge channel: The position of the TX switch at the other
side of the hop. This position may be unknown in case of orderwire
failure.
Switch mode:
- Auto: Switching will be performed automatically based on error
conditions and switch criteria.
- Manual: A manual switch operation is active. Press the Restore button
to restore the protected channel.
Manual request: yes/no. If yes, a manual switch operation has been
requested. Status information on the pending switch request is displayed
below (Channel, Alignment, Switch type, Reversion limit).
B4029
229
LPT line out state: Whether the Line port of the Interface Baseband
Board of the LPT channel is transmitting data traffic or MS-AIS.
- Disabled: MS-AIS is transmitted.
- Enabled. Data traffic is transmitted.
Local TX bridge channel: Status of the local TX bridge. The local TX
bridge is controlled by the RPS system at the remote NE.
Orderwire status: Status of the communication channel used between
the local RPS and the remote RPS.
Switch button: Displays the Manual Switch dialogue box where a manual
switch operation can be performed.
Restore button: Sends a Manual Restore request to the NE that removes
the existing manual switch request and allows automatic protection
control of the channel.
NE. Switch status is continuously updated as long as this property sheet
is open (5 seconds interval).
Channel status property page:
Property page controls: See description above for the specific

switch criteria.
Remote TX status: Status of the TX alarms on the remote NE (on/off).
- Modem board TX alarm.
- Interface board TX alarm.
230
B4029
Operators Guide
Local RX status: Status of the RX criteria on this NE (on/off).
- Low RF signal level (LOW-RF).
- Early Warning (EW).
- Low BER (LBER).
- High BER (HBER).
- Sync loss (OOS).
- Interface regular port input alarm.
- Interface protection port input alarm.
- Alignment indicator.
Modem board absent alarm: (on/off).
Interface board absent alarm: (on/off).
NE. Switch status is continuously updated as long as this property sheet
is open (5 seconds interval).
Manual Switch dialogue box:
This dialogue box is used for sending a manual switch request to the RPS.
When a manual switch is requested the RPS enters manual mode. To revert
back to automatic mode, use the Restore button in the Manual Switch
Control property sheet. Manual switch operations are only performed in
the RX direction (Unidirectional).

Channel to protect: Possible values:
- System with LPT: 1...N, LPT. Selecting LPT means: Transmit LPT on
protection as long as no regular channel degradation reaches the level
defined by Revert on.
- System without LPT: 1N, P. Selecting P means: Revert a protected
channel to its regular state unless its degradation is at or above the level
defined by Revert on.
B4029
231
Alignment:
- Aligned: Checks that the signal from protection channel is aligned with
the signal from the regular channel before the switch operation is
performed. If no alignment is achieved within a certain period of time [see
the Switch Configuration property sheet], the switch operation is
aborted.
- Forced: Performs an immediate switch operation (no alignment).
Switch type:
- Locked: All automatic switch criteria is overridden by this manual
request, and the manually switched channel will not be reverted by any
event other than a manual restore request.
- Not locked: The switch operation will only be executed if no other
channels are degraded to the level defined by Revert on. If another
channels degradation reaches this level later, the manual operation is
suspended and the channel is restored to its regular state. The manual
request will be reactivated when no other channels are degraded to this
level.
Revert on: Revert limit for a manually switched channel. Only applicable
if switch type is Not locked. (Possible values: Low RF, EW, LBER,
HBER, OOS)
OK button: Sends a Manual Switch request to the NE and closes the
dialogue box.
2.3.1.6
Hot Stand-by Systems

Two Hot Stand-by system configurations are supported.
HSB: Performs protection switching on transmitted and received signal. Also denoted regular HSB. This system has one Interface Baseband Board associated with channel 1.
HSB Dual Baseband: Performs protection switching on transmitted
signal only. This system has two Interface Baseband Boards.
232
B4029
Operators Guide
Hot Stand-by Switch System
Modem Board Ch1
Transceiver Unit Ch1
Interface Baseband
Board
Tx
Tx Switch
Rx Switch
Out
Modem Board Ch2
Transceiver Unit Ch2
Branching
In
Hot Stand-by Dual Baseband Switch System

Interface Baseband
Board
Modem Board
Transceiver Unit
In
Ch1
Out
Interface Baseband
Board
In
Modem Board
Transceiver Unit
Branching
Tx Switch
Ch2
Out
Automatic switch/restore:
In regular HSB systems, the automatic switch system can be configured in
either bidirectional or unidirectional mode.
Unidirectional: The TX switch and RX switch operates independently
based on their individual set of switch criteria.
Bidirectional: If the TX switch changes state based on its switch criteria,
the RPS is informed through the Transceiver state indicator on both
channels. The RPS then switches the RX switch to the same channel if
that channel is error-free. If the RX switch changes state based on its
switch criteria, a switch request is also sent to the TX switch. If errorfree bidirectional switching is not possible, the switch operation will be
unidirectional.
Manual switch/restore:
Manual switching can be requested from NEW. In regular HSB systems,
the manual switch operation is Bidirectional.
B4029
233
2.3.1.7
The Switch Configuration property sheet displays/configures the protection switching system (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations).
There is one property sheet for each switch section.

Traffic direction dependency:
- Unidirectional: Receive direction (RX) and transmit direction (TX) are
switched independently.
- Bidirectional: Receive and transmit directions are switched simultaneously (linked).
Switch limit: If the error conditions of the active channels received signal
gets equal to or greater than this limit, an RX switchover to the other
channel is requested.
234
B4029
Operators Guide
2.3.1.8

The Manual Switch Control property sheet displays the current switch
status and also provides a button for manual switching/restoring.
Section Status property page:

Active RX channel: The currently active RX channel. (Not used in HSB
Dual Baseband system configurations)
Active TX channel: The currently active TX channel.
Switch mode:
- Auto: Automatic switching may be performed based on switch criteria
[see Switch Configuration property sheet].
- Manual: A manual switch has been performed. The active channel will
be locked until a manual restore operation is performed.
Switch button: Displays the Manual Switch dialogue box where a manual
switch operation can be performed.
Restore button: Sends a Manual Restore request to the NE that reverts the
switch system to Auto mode.
Switch status is continuously updated as long as this property sheet is
open (5 seconds interval).
B4029
235
Channel Status property page:
Property page controls: See description above for the specific switch
criteria.
Local TX related status: Status of the TX alarms on this NE.
- Transmitter state: (active, muted)
- Transceiver communication: (OK, no response)
- Transmit alarm: (on, off)
- Modem TX alarm: (on, off)
- Interface TX alarm: (on, off)
Local RX status: Status of the RX alarms on this NE (on/off).
- Early warning BER (EW-BER).
- Low BER (LBER).
- High BER (HBER).
- Sync loss (OOS).
- Interface regular port input alarm.
- Interface protection port input alarm.
- Alignment indicator.
Modem board absent alarm: (on/off)
Interface board absent alarm: (on/off)
NE. Manual Switch status is continuously updated as long as this
property sheet is open (5 seconds interval).
236
B4029
Operators Guide
Manual Switch dialogue box:
This dialogue box is used to send a manual switch request to the RPS. When
a manual switch is requested the RPS enters manual mode. A manual
switch operation locks the RX and TX switches on one of the channels (bidirectional). This operation is always forced (no alignment).

Active channel: The channel to become active.
OK button: Sends a Manual Switch request to the NE and closes the
dialogue box.
B4029
237
2.3.2
Diagnose
During the boot process of the boards/units, hardware and software
information is collected. The boot process also performs different tests
on hardware modules on the board/unit. Information gathered in the boot
sequence is displayed in the Diagnose property sheet. The SW on the
board/unit can also be rebooted (warm restart) from this property sheet.
The Supervisory Board contains two main modules: SU and RPS. The
Diagnose property sheet provides one page for each main module.
SU property page:

Boot code version: Displays the SW version of the Boot code.
Application code version: Displays the SW version of the Application
code.
PLD code version: Displays the SW version of the PLD code.
Boot FLASH size: Displays the size of the FLASH memory module used
by the boot code.
Code FLASH size: Displays the size of the FLASH memory module
used by the application code.
SRAM size: Displays the size of the SRAM memory module.
DRAM size: Displays the size of the DRAM memory module.
238
B4029
Operators Guide
Last restart: Displays last restart type:
- Warm: Different events may result in warm restart:
The user has reset the board/unit by pressing the reset button on
front of the board or by sending a SW Restart request from NEW.
A watchdog timer has detected a SW problem.
The user has reconfigured the SW module from NEW. (Some
reconfigurations result in a restart.)
- Cold: Cold restarts are caused by power loss.
Restart counter: Counts number of warm restarts since last power on.
Module info/warnings/errors: Displays information from the module
tests performed at the last restart.
SW Restart button: Sends a SW Restart message to the SW module. This
will result in a warm restart of the board/unit. Note that a warm restart
will not introduce bit errors in the data traffic.
NE.
B4029
239
RPS property page:

code.
FPGA code version: Displays the SW version of the FPGA code.
- Warm: Different events may result in warm restart:
front of the board or by sending a SW Restart request from NEW.
The user has reconfigured the SW module from NEW. (Some
reconfigurations result in a restart.)
SW Restart button: Sends a SW Restart message to the SW module. This
will not introduce bit errors in the data traffic.
NE.
240
B4029
Operators Guide
2.3.3
Production Data
The different boards/units contain production information. This information is displayed in the Production Data property sheet.

Article code: Uniquely identifies the type of board/unit.
Serial no.: The serial number of the board/unit.
HW revision: The hardware revision.
MAC address: The Media Access Control address of the Network
Element.
Production date: When the production process was completed for this
board/unit
Test date: When this product was tested by the factory test-department.
NE.
B4029
241
2.4
XCVR Unit Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the XCVR
Unit node.
Context menu:
Menu text
Power
Frequency
DRO Tuning
Diagnose
Looping
Production Data
2.4.1
Description
Displays the Power property sheet
Displays the Frequency property sheet
Displays the DRO Tuning Dialogue box
Displays the Looping property sheet
RF Power
The XCVR Unit provides a set of RF power control functions:
RF input alarm thresholds can be set such that an alarm is raised when the
input level exceeds the upper or lower limits.
ATPC (Automatic Transceiver Power Control) is a function for effectively
reducing the interference probability in the network. When ATPC is enabled,
the output power from the transmitter is automatically controlled. The
ATPC alarm is generated if ATPC stops functioning. This alarm can be
optionally delayed. Note that ATPC must be available on both sides of the
hop in order to be used [see Available Functions property sheet].
If ATPC is not enabled, the transmitted output level can be set. The
transmitter can also be muted.
The RF Power property sheet is used for displaying/configuring the Power
control settings.
242
B4029
Operators Guide
Mute output power: When checked the output power is muted.
Maximum output level (dBm). The transmitters maximum output power.
Manual Transmit Output Power (MTPC): ATPC is disabled. Constant
manual output level is used.
Automatic Transmit Output Power (ATPC): ATPC is enabled. Output
level is automatically adjusted using the specified ATPC settings.
Alarm Thresholds:
- RF-INPUT-WARNING, high (dBm): If the RF input level exceeds this
value the RF-INPUT-WARNING alarm is raised. Default value:
-30dBm.
- RF-INPUT-WARNING, low (dBm): If the RF input level goes below this
value the RF-INPUT-WARNING alarm is raised. Default value:
-60dBm.
MTPC:
- Manual output level (dBm): The output power used when ATPC is
disabled.
ATPC:
- Reference input level (dBm): The desired input level. If ATPC is enabled
on the transmitter across the hop, that transmitter will regulate its
output power such that the received input level at this receiver is equal
to the reference level.
- Default output level (dBm): The output power to be used if ATPC
regulation loop fails. (The ATPC alarm is raised).
- Alarm delay (s): The delay (in seconds) before the ATPC alarm is raised
after the ATPC regulation loop fails.
NE.
B4029
243
2.4.2
Frequency
The XCVR Units Frequency property sheet displays the frequency settings for the XCVR unit. To change frequency settings use the Frequency
property sheet on the Equipment Node.

Frequency (MHz): The Transmitter and Receiver frequencies.
LO synth. (MHz): The LO synthesizer frequencies.
Frequency band (MHz): The RX and TX frequency limits of the transceiver. The
frequency band is limited by the LO synthesizer and the branching filters.
Branching filter: The centre frequencies and the bandwidths of the RX and TX
branching filters.
Compensation filter: The TX and RX compensation filter settings.
Status: The Transceiver status:
OK: Tuning and branching filters are OK.
Need TX DRO tuning: Open the DRO tuning dialogue box and follow the
instructions.
Need RX DRO tuning: Open the DRO tuning dialogue box and follow the
instructions.
TX branching filter invalid: Replace the filter.
RX branching filter invalid: Replace the filter.
244
B4029
Operators Guide
2.4.3
Space Diversity
A Space Diversity system is using two antennas (denoted Main and
Space) mounted apart and connected to one Space Diversity transceiver to achieve better performance. This requires different wave guide
lengths for the two antennas, which results in different signal propagation
delays at the Main and Space receiver inputs. To compensate for this
effect the transceiver can add delay in one of the signal paths (normally in
the Space path). Optimal receiver performance requires an accurate delay
compensation. The two antenna signals are combined to get a single
received signal for the demodulation process. The combiner can operate
in automatic mode (controlled by signal quality criteria derived internally
in the transceiver) or in manual mode (user selects how to combine the
signals).
Configuration

B4029
245
Note!
Note!

Combiner mode: Auto: The transceiver selects which signal to use.
Disables Channel(s) used combo box. Manual: The user selects which
signal to use. Enables Channel(s) used combo box.
Channel(s) used: Main, Space or Combined. When Combiner mode is
set to Manual, the user may choose which signal to use.
When Combiner mode is set to Auto, it shows whether the Main, Space
or combined signal is used.
The Automatic Gain Control level (AGC level), that can be measured on
the front of the Transceiver, gives the level of the Space channel when
manually set to Space, while the level of the Main channel is given when
in automatic mode or manually set to Main channel.
Automatic adjustment: Opens Automatic Space Delay Calculation dialogue and starts the coherent delay calculation routine in the modem card.
The routine uses the delay value currently set on the transceiver as
starting point for its measurements and the coherent calculations. To
achieve the best result it is recommended that the approximate delay is
selected and set on the transceiver before starting the mentioned routine.
Delay (ns): Add the specified delay to the signal path.
Valid range is +/- 130.
Automatic Space Delay Calculation
To simplify installation of a Space Diversity system, an automatic space
delay calculation routine is implemented on the modem board. This routine
attempts to calculate the optimal delay for the given system based on
measurements from the modem board and transceiver unit.
Note!
246
The routine uses the delay value currently set on the transceiver as starting
point for its measurements and the coherent calculations. To achieve the
best result it is recommended that the approximate delay is selected and set
on the transceiver before starting the automatic space delay calculation
routine.
B4029
Operators Guide
The graph in the dialogue displays the calculated Delay Compensation

Value as a function of the delay (in nanoseconds), and is updated each time
a new delay value is set in the transceiver. The delay currently used in the
calculation is displayed above the graph.
The optimal delay is normally found at the graphs minimum. The valid
range for the delay is +/- 130 ns.
Zooming: Zoom in on details by left-clicking and dragging the mouse.
Zoom out by right-clicking.
Graph coordinates: If the cursor is positioned over a valid delay on the
graph, the coordinates for that delay are displayed in a popup window.
B4029
247
2.4.3.1
Space Diversity Combiner Statistics

The Space Diversity Combiner Statistics page gives the user extended
information regarding Space Diversity systems. The information might be
useful during configuration of the delay imposed in order to achieve
optimum signal reception.
The two graphs show the RSSI levels [dBm] of Main and Space signals and
the dispersion of the same signals. Detailed information regarding the
dispersion graph is included further down.
The Space Diversity Combiner Statistics page have a few useful features:
Persistent polling
Automatic logging of data to file
Versatile graphs
All features are explained in more detail further down.

248
B4029
Operators Guide
RSSI level graph: RSSI levels for Main and Space signals on vertical
and horiontal axes, respectively.
Dispersion graph: Measurement of the dispersion between the two
signal.
-1 = Dispersion in the upper frequency band of the channel gives a
negative slope to the received signal
0 = ideal
1 = Dispersion in the lower frequency band of the channel creates a
positive slope to the received signal
(see also detailed information below)
Number of samples: Total number of samples retrieved (and displayed)
in current statistics set. Reset to 0 when Delete Stat is clicked.
Read-only.
Polling interval: Number of seconds between each poll for data.
Editable when polling is not active.
Start time: Shows (if currently polling) the date and time of when polling
for the currently shown data was started.
Read-only.
Start/stop button: Start/stop polling using this button.
Delete Stat button: Removes all data from the graph. Sets Number of
samples to 0 and resets start time of polling.
Log file remains unchanged.
2.4.3.1.1
Dispersion Graph
The dispersion graph shows the dispersion activity in each channel. The
purpose of the graph is to evaluate if there is simultaneous dispersion
activity in the two channels. If this happens, bit errors may occur. The space
diversity system does not handle all situations with simultaneous dispersion in both channels. This could indicate that antenna position is not
optimal.
The dispersion graph in the screenshot above was created using a fading
simulator with a repeating dispersion pattern with dispersion in only one
channel at a time. This is not the typical condition you would get in the
field. The graph shows that the dispersion is in one channel at a time since
the plot follows the axes. The system handles this condition with no errors.
The dispersion measurement is calculated from a slope measurement of
the received signal. The slope of the signal is scaled to an interval from -1
to +1. Outside these limits the system can no longer safely demodulate each
channel separately. When the slope is outside the limit, it will be plotted as
+1 or -1 in the graph.
B4029
249
2.4.3.1.2
Persistent polling
Polling is controlled by clicking the Start/Stop button. If polling is
enabled and the Space Diversity Statistics page is closed, NEW-NMS
continues to poll. The next time the property page is opened, all data in
polling statistic are shown. Polling is stopped when NEW-NMS is closed.
2.4.3.1.3
Automatic logging of data

All Space Diversity Combiner Statistic data retrieved by NEW-NMS for
each polled transceiver, are logged in individual text files. Every sample
is time stamped. This allows for time based plotting of data in Excel:
1.Insert data into Excel (import or copy and paste).
2.Change time format:
I. Mark time stamp column and open Format cells dialog.
II. Under Number tab, change Category to Custom
III. In Type list select dd/mm/yy hh:mm and change to dd/mm/yy
hh:mm:ss.000 (for simplicity omit date if time span is within
same day). Press OK.
IV. If cells containing time values show ####, increase column
width until normal values appear.
3.The formula for calculating the dispersion measurements (slopes)
used in the dispersion graph is (High band detector level - Low band
detector level)/100. In the log file, these values are found under Slope
Data Main/Space as HB and LB, respectively.
4.Mark desired data and start Excels Chart Wizard
5.Select XY (Scatter) as chart type and desired chart sub-type (e.g.
Scatter with data points connected by smoothed lines).
6.Continue thru wizard and click Finish.
Note!
250
Opening the log file in Word or Excel while polling is active, may cause
loss of log data.
These programs deny other programs access to files opened normally.
Therefore NEW-NMS will not be able to append the log file under these
circumstances.
To avoid this problem, the log file must be opened as a copy or copied
to a different folder before opening.
Logging is stopped if free disk space where NEW-NMS is installed
drops below 50 MB. The protection mechanism is implemented to
avoid flooding the hard disk. This may occur during long term polling
with short polling interval (with 1 second interval the log file grows
approx. 200 kB/h or 4.7 MB/day).
Logging is resumed when free space exceeds 50 MB.
B4029
Operators Guide
2.4.3.1.4
Versatile graphs
The graphs have the following features:
Zooming: Zoom in on details by left-clicking and dragging the mouse.
Zoom out by right-clicking.
Graph coordintates: If the cursor is positioned over a valid sample on the
graph, the coordinates for that sample are displayed in a popup window.
B4029
251
2.4.4
DRO Tuning
The XCVR Units DRO Tuning property sheet is used to enable and disable
DRO Tuning mode for the individual XCVR unit. The tuning of the DRO
frequency is performed manually on the XCVR unit.
See chapter 8.0 in this section for frequency setting.

DRO Tuning Mode:
- Disabled: DRO Tuning mode is disabled for both DROs
- TX Tuning: Enables DRO Tuning mode for TX DRO
- RX Tuning: Enables DRO Tuning mode for RX DRO
Status TX: Displays information concerning frequency lock and screw
direction for TX DRO
Status RX: Displays information concerning frequency lock and screw
direction for RX DRO
252
B4029
Operators Guide
2.4.5
Looping
A looping function is provided as a powerful tool for testing different system
modules.
Available Loop:
Transceiver Near End IF Loop: The IF input signal from the Modem Board
signal is looped back to IF output.
The Looping property sheet displays the main traffic loop for the selected
Transceiver Unit. The loop can be toggled on/off by using the loop button.
When activating a loop, a Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed where the
user must enter the time period that the loop shall be active. Activating a loop
may disconnect NEW from the NE (Deactivating the loop manually may not
be possible.)
Main loops for all boards/units in the system can be displayed from the
Equipment node.
B4029
253

status of the loop:
- Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has not
been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the
NE and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop
settings have not been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot
be toggled when the status is unknown.
main traffic loops in the NE will be cleared. This time is set by the user
when activating a loop.
NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 seconds interval) as long as this
254
B4029
Operators Guide
2.4.6
Diagnose
During the boot process of the boards/units hardware and software information is collected. The boot process also performs different tests on the
hardware modules installed on the board/unit. Information gathered in the
boot sequence is displayed in the Diagnose property sheet. The SW on the
board/unit can also be rebooted (warm start) from this property sheet.

code.
FLASH size: Displays the size of the FLASH memory module.
B4029
255
- Warm: Different situations may result in warm restart:
front of the board/unit or by sending a SW Restart request from
NEW.
The user has reconfigured the board/unit from NEW. (Some reconfigurations result in a restart.)
SW Restart button: Sends a SW Restart message to the unit/board. This
will introduce bit errors in the data traffic.
NE.
256
B4029
Operators Guide
2.4.7
Production Data
The different boards/units contain some production information. This
information is displayed in the Production Data property sheet.

board/unit
NE.
B4029
257
2.5
Modem Board Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the Modem
Board node.
Context menu:
Menu text
Error Pulse Output
Looping
Diagnose
Production Data
2.5.1
Description
Displays the Pulse Output property sheet
Error Pulse Output

The Demodulator generates pulses when transmission errors are detected. The number of pulses per second is a measurement of quality of the
received signals. These pulses can be routed out on the connection panel.
Note that these pulses are generated for each radio channel before
protection switching.
The Error Pulse Output property sheet displays/configures the output of
error pulses.

258
B4029
Operators Guide
Disabled/Enabled: Disables or enables error pulses to be routed to the
connection panel.
Source: Selects which error pulses to be routed to the connection panel.
Values:
- FEC Demodulator: FEC pulses from the Viterbi Decoder.
- B1 Demodulator: B1 pulses from the Demodulator.
- B2 Demodulator: B2 pulses from the Demodulator.
NE.
2.5.2
Looping
Different looping functions are provided as a powerful tool for testing
different system modules.
Available Loops:
Modem Near End IF Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the
Line output. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface and
Modem Board.
Modem Far End Loop: The Radio input signal from the remote element
is looped back to the Radio output. This loop tests the functionality of
the Modem Board and Transceiver Unit on this element and the remote
element.
The Looping property sheet displays main traffic loops for the selected
Modem Board. Loops can be toggled on/off by using the loop buttons.
When activating a loop, a Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed where the
user must enter the time period that the loop shall be active. Activating a
loop may disconnect NEW from the NE. (Deactivating the loop manually
may not be possible).
activating a loop, the NE will automatically deactivate any other active
loops on the same channel. This is to prevent the user from setting circular
loops.
Equipment node.
B4029
259

status of the loop:
- Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has not been
retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the NE
and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings
have not been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be
toggled when the status is unknown.
main traffic loops in the NE will be cleared. This time is set by the user when
activating a loop.
260
B4029
Operators Guide
2.5.3
Diagnose
See SVCE Board Diagnose
2.5.4
Production Data
See SVCE Board Production Data
2.6
Modem Board - Radio Port Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the Radio
Port node.
Context menu:
Menu text
BER Thresholds
2.6.1
Description
Displays the Bit Error Rate Thresholds property sheet
BER Thresholds
The Viterbi decoder is using a Viterbi low complexity algorithm for
decoding and error correcting the received bit-sequence. The Viterbi Bit
Error Rate is used as quality measurement for the radio hop.
Alarms are generated when the Viterbi Bit Error Rate exceeds certain
threshold values.
Alarm name
HBER
LBER
EW
Default BER threshold

10 -3
10 -6
10-10
Default alarm severity

Major
Minor
Warning
Internal proportions: HBER>LBER>EW

The BER thresholds can be displayed/configured in the BER Thresholds
property sheet.
B4029
261

HBER: A HBER alarm is generated and AIS is inserted when the bit error
rate exceeds this value. Value range: 10-3 - 10-12.
LBER: A LBER alarm is generated when the bit error rate exceeds this
value. Value range: 10-3 - 10-12.
Early warning (EW): An EW alarm is generated when the bit error rate
exceeds this value. Value range: 10-3 - 10-12.
NE.
262
B4029
Operators Guide
2.7
Interface Baseband Board Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the Interface Baseband Board node.
Context menu:
Menu text
Available Functions
Wayside Channel
Looping
Diagnose
Production Data
2.7.1
Description
Displays the Wayside Channel property sheet
Available Functions
your Nera equipment supplier. You will then get an encrypted authentication string that can be used to make functions available for a specific board
with a given serial number.
The Available Functions property sheet displays/configures availability of
optional functions. To make new functions available, press the Set button
and a dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the authentication
string.

Set button: Displays the Available Functions Authentication dialogue
box.
B4029
263
Property page controls: The check boxes are only for display purposes.
To modify available functions press the property sheets Set button and
enter the authentication string.
Wayside Channel: When checked, the Wayside function is available on
this board Note that Configuration of the Wayside channel is provided
in the Wayside property sheet.
NE.
2.7.2
DS3/E3 Looping
The DS3/E3 card includes three PDH ports, each of which supports looping.
The card supports Far End Loop, Near End Loop, PRBS insertion and PRBS
verification. The loops are available when the PDH Ports on the DS3/E3 card
has been configured to add or drop traffic.
A PRBS signal can be inserted on all three PDH ports instead of the regular
traffic. The incoming PRBS signal can then be checked in order to verify the
quality of the communication path. To check the quality of the signal, a PRBS
counter is configured to count the errors on one of the PDH Ports in one of
the DS3/E3 directions. An error is detected when the signal differs from the
expected PRBS signal.
The DS3/E3 card has one PRBS generator that can be muxed into either
inbound or outbound direction on one or more ports simultaneously. The
PRBS generator can be inverted. For E3 the PRBS polynom is 223 - 1 and for
DS3 the PRBS polynom is 215 -1. The PRBS checker is available at one of the
PDH ports in either inbound or outbound direction and can also check
inverted PRBS signals.
The Looping Configuration Property sheet can be opened from the Configuration context menu of the Interface Base-band Board in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Interface Baseband Board in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Looping from the
Configuration menu.
264
B4029
Operators Guide

Help button: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet.
way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes the status
of the loop:
retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the NE
and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings
have not been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be
toggled when the status is unknown.
PRBS Generator: Generates a PRBS signal that can be inserted into one or
both directions of the PDH Port.
Arrow buttons: Press a button to insert the PRBS signal from the generator
to the PDH Port. Red=enabled, black=disabled, blue=unknown status.
Inverted: When checked, the generated PRBS signal is inverted.
PRBS Check: Counts PRBS errors. Errors can be counted on one of the PDH
ports in one of the DS3/E3 directions at a time.
B4029
265
Arrow buttons: Press a button to enable the error detection for the desired
traffic direction. Red=enabled, black=disabled, blue=unknown status.
Inverted: When checked, an inverted PRBS signal is expected.
Count: The total number of deviations detected between the received
signal and expected PRBS signal.
Rate: The number of deviations detected between the received signal and
expected PRBS signal per second.
Reset button. Resets the cumulative counter.
Status:
OK: Error check is valid.
Counter overflow: The error check is not valid because the counter has
exceeded its limit (=232) and wrapped around.
Sync loss: The error check is not valid due to sync loss on the PRBS
sequence.
Loop status is updated regularly (5 second interval) as long as this
property sheet is open.
2.7.3
Wayside Channel
A Wayside Channel can be inserted into the SOH frame in either linedirection or radio direction. The Wayside Channel occupies 33 bytes (32
bytes data + 1 byte alignment information) of the SOH frame.
The Wayside property sheet displays/configures the Wayside Channel.
266
B4029
Operators Guide
Note: The Wayside function must be available on the board in order to be
used. [see the Available Functions property sheet.]
Status: When enabled, the Wayside channel is inserted into the SOH
frame. If any of the 33 time-slots are occupied, the user will be notified when
trying to enable the wayside channel.
Direction: The traffic direction where the Wayside channel is inserted into
the SOH frame:
- Line (dir 1): Line direction of the main traffic channel.
- Radio (dir 1): Radio direction of the main traffic channel.
- Line dir 2: Only available for double terminals.
- Radio dir 2: Only available for double terminals.
Rate: Configures the data rate of the Wayside channel. This field is only
available for Network Elements that support the DS1 rate, otherwise the
rate is assumed to be E1.
- E1: The rate is 2Mbit/s.
- DS1: The rate is 1.5Mbit/s
Coding: This field is only available for Network Elements that support the
DS1 rate, otherwise the coding is assumed to be HDB3.
- HDB3 (only available when the rate is E1)
- AMI (only available when the rate is DS1)
- B8ZS (only available when the rate is DS1)
Sensitivity: This field is only available for Network Elements that support
the DS1 rate.
- -12dB Short Haul (only available when the rate is E1).
- -43dB Long Haul (only available when the rate is E1).
- -30dB Limited Long Haul (only available when the rate is DS1).
- -36dB Long Haul (only available when the rate is DS1).
SOH frame button: Displays the SOH Selection dialog box, showing the
current use of the SOH frame.
B4029
267
Cable Length: This field is only available for Network Elements that
support the DS1 rate. The DS1 rate must be set.
- 133-266 feet
- 266-399 feet
- 399-533 feet
- 533-655 feet
- -7.5dB CSU
- -15dB CSU
- -22dB CSU
2.7.4
Looping
The Interface Baseband Board provides different looping functions as a
powerful tool for testing different system modules. The board also provides
PRBS generators and PRBS error counters for the 2Mbit/s Wayside channel.
Loops and PRBS settings can be displayed/configured from the Looping
property sheet.
2.7.4.1
Main Loops
Available Loops:
Baseband Line Near End Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the
Line output. This loop tests the line input/output circuitry.
Baseband Near End Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the Line
output at the interface towards the Modem Board. This loop tests the
functionality of the Interface Board.
Baseband Far End Loop: The input signal from the Modem Board is looped
back to the Modem Board at the Customer Line Interface. This loop tests the
functionality of the Interface Board, Modem Board and Transceiver Unit on
this element in addition to the hop and the remote element.
The Looping property sheet displays main traffic loops for the selected
Interface Baseband Board. Loops can be toggled on/off by using the loop
buttons. When activating a loop, a Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed
where the user must enter the time period that the loop shall be active.
Activating a loop may disconnect NEW from the NE. (Deactivating the loop
manually may not be possible).
268
B4029
Operators Guide
Equipment node.

Propertypagecontrols:
Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates which way the
signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes the status of the loop:
retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the NE and the
GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings have not been
confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be toggled when the status is
unknown.
main traffic loops in the NE will be cleared. This time is set by the user when
activating a loop [See the Loop Timer dialog box]
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Loop
status is updated regularly (5 seconds interval) as long as this dialogue box is open.
B4029
269
2.7.4.2
Wayside Channel Loops and PRBS Settings

Available Loops:
Wayside Far End Loop
Wayside Near End Loop
A PRBS signal (215-1) can be inserted into both traffic directions of the
wayside channel instead of the regular traffic. A PRBS counter can be
configured to count PRBS errors on one of the traffic directions. This is
a powerful way to test the quality of the radio connection.
Note: Wayside Channel must be enabled on this board to use these test
functions [see the Wayside Channel property sheet].

Loop buttons: See description of main traffic loop buttons above.
PRBS Generator: Generates a PRBS signal that can be inserted into one or
both directions of the wayside channel.
- Arrow buttons: Press a button to insert the PRBS signal from the
generator to the wayside channel. Red=enabled, black=disabled,
blue=unknown status.
- Inverted: When checked, the generated PRBS signal is inverted.
270
B4029
Operators Guide
PRBS Check: Counts PRBS errors (An error is detected when the signal
differs from the expected PRBS signal). Errors can be counted at one of
the directions of the wayside channel.
- Arrow buttons: Press a button to enable the error detection for the
desired traffic direction. Red=enabled, black=disabled, blue=unknown
status.
- Inverted: When checked, an inverted PRBS signal is expected.
- Count: The total number of deviations detected between the received
signal and expected PRBS signal.
- Rate: The number of deviations detected between the received signal
and expected PRBS signal per second.
- Reset button. Resets the cumulative counter.
- Status:
OK: Error check is valid.
Wayside Channel disabled: Wayside channel is not enabled [See the
Wayside Channel property sheet].
Counter overflow: The error check is not valid because the counter
has exceeded its limit (=232) and wrapped around.
Sync loss: The error check is not valid due to sync loss on the PRBS
sequence.
2.7.5
Diagnose
See SVCE Board Diagnose
2.7.6
Production Data
See SVCE Board Production Data
B4029
271
2.8
Interface Board - Optical Port Node

The following table describes the configuration function for the Optical
Port node. (This function is only available for SMF optical interfaces).
Context menu:
Menu text
Laser Control
2.8.1
Description
Displays the Laser Control property sheet
Laser Control
The laser at the optical interface can be operated in two different modes:
Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS): This function is designed for eye
safety purposes according to ITU-T G.958. In this mode, the laser is
automatically shut off after 2 seconds when Loss Of Optical Signal is
detected by the receiver on the other side of the hop. After a certain
Waiting time the laser is turned on. This sequence is repeated until an
optical signal is detected on the other side of the hop.
LOS detected
signal detected
2s
2s
2s
Laser Output
Waiting time
Waiting time
Waiting time
Manual control: The laser can be switched on/off manually from NEW.
272
B4029
Operators Guide
ALS: Automatic Laser Shutdown. The laser is automatically switched
on/off.
- Enabled: The Laser is operated in ALS mode. The laser cannot be
manually switched on/off.
- Disabled: The Laser is operated in manual mode. The laser can be
manually switched on/off.
- Waiting time: The period of time the laser is off after automatic laser
shutdown.
- Get button: Retrieves the current ALS settings from the NE.
- Set button: Sends the current ALS control settings to the NE.
- Restart (90s) button: Used for test purposes to force the laser on for
90 seconds.
- Restart (2s) button: Used for test purposes to force the laser on for 2
seconds.
Manual Control: The laser can be manually switch on/off.
- Status: Displays whether the laser is on or off.
- On button: Turns the laser on. (Only available when ALS is disabled.)
- Off button: Turns the laser off. (Only available when ALS is disabled.)
Close button: Closes this dialogue box.
B4029
273
2.9
DS3/E3 Configuration
The DS3/E3 functionality allows the operator to route data between the
individual ports and containers. The connections are identified by using the
background colour of the ports together with the KLM address of the virtual
container. The background colour of a virtual container identifies the source
port, while the KLM address identifies the source address.
As an example consider the marked virtual containers in the figure below. The
virtual container 2.0.0 on the Line Port is connected with the virtual container
having a KLM address of 2.0.0 on the Radio Port. The virtual container with
KLM address 3.0.0 on the Radio Port is connected with the virtual container
having a KLM address of 3.0.0 on the DS3/E3 Port.
SNCP functionality is available on the DS3/E3 Port and is identified with a
split cell.
Traffic Looping is achieved by connecting virtual containers on the same
port and is only available for the line - and radio port. The DS3/E3 port does
not support traffic looping, but does however support test looping. DS3/E3
looping is available when the port has been configured to add/drop traffic.
The DS3/E3 Configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Interface node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Interface node in the Explorer view
and then selecting Edit DS3/E3 from the Configuration menu .
274
B4029
Operators Guide
Property Page Controls:

SNCP: Press this button to establish an SNCP connection. The SNCP
functionality will apply to the same virtual container on all ports. SNCP is
available on the DS3/E3 Port.
Source: To establish a connection, select a virtual container from one of
the ports. Press this button to set the selected container as the source.
Destination: Select a virtual container from one of the ports and press this
button to set the selected container as the destination.
Disconnect: Select a virtual container which already has an established
connection. Press this button to remove the connection.
Cancel: Press this button to undo the current operation.
Get: Press this button to retrieve the current settings from the Network
Element. (The settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the
dialogue box is opened).
Set: Press this button to send the settings to the Network Element.
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet. For help
on an item, click at the top of the dialogue box, then click the item.
B4029
275
2.10
DS3/E3 Frame Structure Configuration

The operator is given a graphical presentation of the frame structure on the
three ports. The frame structure is always of type VC-3.
Each port consists of three TUG-3s ( SDH Multiplex Structure ). Each TUG3 contains a VC-3 structure structure. The virtual containers on the ports are
identified using KLM notation:
The Frame Structure Configuration property page is available from the

Transmission Configuration property sheet. Select Enable DS3/E3 from
the Termination Enabling combo box in the Transmission Configuration
property page. The Transmission Configuration property sheet can be
opened from the Configuration context menu of the channel node below the
transmission node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by
selecting (highlighting) the channel node in the Explorer view and then
selecting Edit Transmission Configuration from the Configuration menu.
276
B4029
Operators Guide
Property Page Controls:

VC-3: Sets the current structure to VC-3
Get: Press this button to retrieve the current settings from the Network
Element. (The settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the
dialogue box is opened).
Set: Press this button to send the settings to the Network Element.
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet. For help
on an item, click at the top of the dialogue box, then click the item.
SDH: This button indicates that the transmission standard is set to SDH.
SONET: This button indicates that the transmission standard is set to
SONET.
B4029
277
2.11
SVCE Board Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the SVCE
Board node.
Context menu:
Menu text
Available Functions
64kb/s Channels
Telephone Settings
Looping
Diagnose
Production Data
278
Description
Displays the 64kb/s Channels property sheet
Displays the Phone Settings property sheet
B4029
Operators Guide
2.11.1
Available Functions
your Nera equipment supplier. You will then get an encrypted authentication string that can be used for making functions available for this specific
board.
The Available Functions property sheet displays/configures availability of
optional functions. To make new functions available, press the Set button
and a dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the authentication
string.

Set button: Displays the Available Functions Authentication dialogue
box.
Property page controls: The check-boxes are only for display purposes.
To modify available functions, press the property sheets Set button and
enter the authentication string.
64 kb/s channels: When checked, the 64kb/s channels are available on
this board. The 64kb/s channels are configured from the 64kb/s Channels property sheet.
NE.
B4029
279
2.11.2
64kb/s Channels
On the SVCE board up to four 64kb/s channels can be inserted into the
SOH in either line direction or radio direction. A 64kb/s channel occupies
1 byte (SOH byte) of the SOH. Different electrical interfaces are supported: Channels 1 and 3 support G.703 Co and G.703 Contra, while channels
2 and 4 support V.11 Contra. Customer interfaces are located at the
connection panel.
Near end loops are available for each 64kb/s channel for test purposes [see
SVCE Board Looping property sheet]
The 64kb/s channels property sheet is used to display/configure the four
64kb/s channels.
Note: 64kb/s channels must be available on the board in order to be used.

[See the Available Functions property sheet for the SVCE Board].
280
B4029
Operators Guide
Channel: The main traffic channel where the 64kb/s channel is inserted
into a SOH byte.
Direction: The traffic direction where the 64kb/s channel is inserted
into a SOH byte:
- Line: Line direction of a channel that only has one line direction (one
interface board).
- Line (dir1): Line direction 1 of a channel that has two line directions
(two interface boards in a double terminal system).
- Line (dir2): Line direction 2 of a channel that has two line directions
(two interface boards in a double terminal system).
- Radio: Radio direction of a channel that only has one radio direction
(one transceiver unit).
- Radio (dir1): Radio direction 1 of a channel that has two radio
directions (two transceiver units in a double terminal or repeater
system).
- Radio (dir2): Radio direction 2 of a channel that has two radio
directions (two transceiver units in a double terminal or repeater
system).
Status: When enabled, the 64kb/s channel is inserted into the selected
SOH byte.
Type: Electrical interface: See diagram below for description of the
different interfaces.
- G.703 Co
- G.703 Contra
- V.11 Contra
SOH byte: The SOH byte to use for this 64kb/s channel. If pressing the
SOH button, a SOH byte Selection dialogue box is displayed showing the
current use of the SOH frame.
NE.
B4029
281
2.11.3
Telephone Settings
The Telephone Settings property sheet is used to display/configure SVCE
telephone interfaces.

Traffic SOH channel: Insertion of service telephone channel (64kb/s) into
radio direction(s) of traffic channel 1 (and channel P in a N+1 system or
channel 2 in a HSB system). The service telephone channel is only inserted
in radio direction(s), not in the line direction(s) (for repeaters and double
terminals, the service telephone channel is inserted in both radio directions).
- Enabled: When checked the service telephone channel is inserted into
the selected SOH byte.
282
B4029
Operators Guide
B4029
- SOH byte: The SOH byte to use for this telephone network. If pressing the
SOH button, a SOH byte selection dialogue is displayed showing the
current use of the SOH frame. SOH bytes supporting E/M Wire and control
signals: E1, F1and E2. (The use of PABX adapter requires control signals).
PABX: Private Automatic Branch eXchange. To connect the service
telephone to an external PABX subscriber line. (Only available on SVCE
boards that contains a PABX adapter)
- Number: The number of this PABX adapter. This is the number that
must be called to access the external PABX connection. Note that the
number must be preceded by #. Values: #1...#8. Maximum number of
PABX adapters in a system is 8, and each must have a unique number.
Internal telephone: This is the handset connected at the shelf connection
panel to connector marked PHONE4/PHONE5. The handset is supplied
by NERA and the interface dont need any adaptation.
- Number: The number of the internal telephone. This is the number that must
be called to make this telephone ring. Values 00..99, always use two digits.
Each telephone in a system must have a unique number.
- Input level from mic. (dBm): Not adjustable. Nominal value: 0.0dBm.
- Output level to speaker (dBm): Not adjustable. Nominal value: -6.0dBm.
External telephone: This is a handset that can be located up to 1000 meters
away. The interface gain can be varied to accept different mic. input level
and output level to speaker. If the interface is unused, input- and outputamplifiers can be switched off.
- Number: The number of the external telephone. This is the number that
must be called to make this telephone ring. Values 00..99, always use
two digits. Each telephone in a system must have a unique number.
- Input level from mic. (dBm): Adjustable range: 1.0dBm to 5.0dBm
in 0.5dBm steps or off. Nominal value: 0.0 dBm.
- Output level to speaker (dBm): Adjustable range: -5.0dBm to
11.0dBm in 0.5dBm steps or off. Nominal value: -6.0 dBm.
Other Equipment 1 & 2: These two balanced interfaces are meant for
interconnection between similar equipment. A maximum of 3 service
telephone boards can be connected this way. These interfaces are not
over-voltage protected and not galvanic isolated and are therefore not
recommended for long lines or outdoor use. The input gain can be
adjusted 1dB to compensate for cable loss and component variations.
If the interface is unused, the input amplifier can be switched off.
- Port input level (dBm): Adjustable range: -5.0dBm to 7.0dBm in
0.5dBm steps or off. Nominal value: -6.0 dBm.
- Port output level (dBm): Not adjustable. Nominal value 6.0dBm.
4 Wire interface: This is a balanced, galvanic isolated interface meant to
interface to various types of equipment. Input- and output- gain can be
adjusted over a wide range. This interface can be used together with E/M283
wire to fulfil a standard multiplex channel. If the interface is unused, the

input- and outputamplifiers can be switched off.
Port input level (dBm): Adjustable range: -0.5dBm to 16.0dBm in 0.5dBm
steps or off. Nominal value: -6.0 dBm.
Port output level (dBm): Adjustable range: -3.5dBm to 19.0dBm in 0.5dBm
steps or off. Nominal value: -6.0 dBm.
Engineering OrderWire: This balanced interface is used when more than
3 service telephone boards have to be connected. The interface is not
over-voltage protected. Together with one of the Other Equipment
interfaces a serial connection can be established. Internal telephone and
loudspeaker are not connected to this interface. Internal telephone will
therefore function properly only on the two service boards connected to
the Other Equipment interface.
- Port input level (dBm): Not adjustable: Nominal value 6.0dBm.
- Port output level (dBm): Not adjustable: Nominal value 6.0dBm.
Enable insertion of analog equipment (off hook simulation): Used for
connection to Other Equipment. Must be checked in order to use PABX,
Other Equipment, 4 Wire interface or Engineering OrderWire.
Terminate (dir2): When checked, the SOH byte for the telephone network
in radio dir2 is terminated. Used in Double Terminal system configurations to terminate a ring network (Only displayed in Double Terminal
system configurations.)
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. 1.
E/M-Wire
The Service Channel can be used as a through connection of a Multiplexer
Channel. By activating M-Wire (Inp) at one side of the radio hop, E-Wire
(Out) will be activated on the other side.
Ctrl Inp/Ctrl Out
The Ctrl signal is used for connection/disconnection of a PABX and to
switch loudspeakers ON/OFF. The Ctrl signal is activated by lifting the
telephone Off Hook and pushing the # button, and deactivated by putting
the telephone back On Hook. By activating the Ctrl signal both Ctrl Out
on own Service Board and the Service Board on the other side of the radio
hop, are activated. Between RPS-sections, Ctrl Out must be wired to Ctrl
Inp to take effect at the next section. If a PABX is connected at a station
with two or more terminals, all Ctrl Out signals have to be interconnected.
Call Inp/Call Out
These signals are dedicated for collective call to/from other Service Channel
equipment with different Call Signal from DTMF (e.g. Nera Service Telephone, 2NF467A). When Call Inp is activated, Internal- and External284
B4029
Operators Guide
telephones will start ringing on both sides of the radio hop, and the Call Out
will be activated on the other side. If a Collective Call is sent from this board,
by pressing * button, the Call Out on both sides of the hop will be
activated.
Loudspeaker
A loudspeaker output without volume control is provided. Signals from
Engineering Orderwire inp. and from Internal Telephone, are not connected to loudspeaker output.
Signalling via Optocoupler
Three Inp/Out-signals are connected via optocouplers. Connection of
correct ground and battery polarity, are automatically switched, dependent
on which battery pole is grounded.
Grounding of positive battery pole, principle drawing:
+5V
From Logic
Out
-VBAT
To Logic
Inp
+5V
Grounding of negative battery pole, principle drawing:

+5V
Out
From Logic
Inp
To Logic
+VBAT
B4029
+5V
285
2.11.4
Looping
The SVCE Board Looping property sheet displays the 64kb/s channel
loops. Loops can be toggled on/off by using the loop buttons. Several
loops can be active at the same time. Unlike the main loops, there is no
loop timer that automatically clears the 64kb/s channel loops. When a
loop is active a corresponding alarm is raised on the board/unit.

Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates
which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes
the status of the loop:
- Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has yet
not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent
to the NE and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The
loop settings have not yet been confirmed by the NE). Note that the
loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown.
- Grey: The corresponding 64kb/s channel is not enabled.
286
B4029
Operators Guide
2.11.5
Diagnose
During the boot process of the boards/units hardware and software information is collected. The boot process also performs different tests on the
hardware modules installed on the board/unit. Information gathered in the
boot sequence is displayed in the Diagnose property sheet. The SW on the
board/unit can also be rebooted (warm start) from this property sheet.

code.
PLD code version: Displays the SW version of the PLD code.
FLASH size: Displays the size of the FLASH memory module.
- Warm: Different situations may result in warm restart:
The user has reset the board/unit by pressing the reset button on front
of the board/unit or by sending a SW Restart request from NEW.
The user has reconfigured the board/unit from NEW. (Some reconfigurations result in a restart.)
B4029
287
SW Restart button: Sends a SW Restart message to the unit/board. This
will introduce bit errors in the data traffic.
NE.
288
B4029
Operators Guide
2.11.6
Production Data
The different boards/units contain production information. This information is displayed in the Production Data property sheet.

board/unit
NE.
B4029
289
2.12
Transmission RX Interface Nodes

The following table describes the configuration function for the RX
Interface nodes in the Transmission branch.
Context menu:
Menu text
AIS Insert
2.12.1
Description
Displays the AIS Insert property sheet
AIS Insert
The Path Trace functionality and the AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) functionality are used to verify that the received STM-1 frames are the frames
we want to receive (correct routing, frequency alignment. . . . ). This is done
by either inserting a fixed byte or a user defined ASCII string in the J0 slot
in the RSOH, or a two bit RF ID symbol at the transmit end. This is done
from the path trace sheet. The RF ID functionality is only available at the
Radio side. The radio that receives the STM-1 frames must have the same
Trace string (J0) or RF ID defined in the AIS insert sheet. If there is a
mismatch, an AIS can be inserted. An AIS can also be inserted if the HBER
threshold is exceeded.

290
B4029
Operators Guide
Insert AIS when Viterbi HBER threshold exceeded: When checked, an
Alarm Indication Signal is inserted when the Viterbi HBER threshold is
exceeded.
Insert AIS When trace mismatch: When checked, an Alarm Indication
Signal is inserted when there is a mismatch between the trace string set
in the Path Trace property sheet and the trace string specified in this
property sheet.
Insert AIS when RF ID mismatch: When checked, an Alarm Indication
Signal is inserted when there is a mismatch between the RF ID set in the
Path Trace property sheet and the RF ID specified in this property sheet.
The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio node.
AIS remove delay:
Regenerator Section Trace (J0):
- Not used: The Regenerator Section Trace String is not used.
- Fixed byte: The Regenerator Section Trace String is one byte ( =8bit)
long.
- User Message (ASCII): The Regenerator Section Trace String is a
user defined message ASCII (sixteen bytes =128bits long)
- Expected: The ASCII string or fixed byte to be compared with received
J0 in RSOH. If mismatch, AIS will be inserted if the Insert AIS when
trace mismatch is checked. The Expected field normally contains
the same values as the Trace String in the Path Trace property sheet
at the transmit end of the path.
- Received: The ASCII string or fixed byte in received J0 in RSOH.
- Status: The status of the Regenerator Section Trace:
OK: Expected and received Regenerator Section Trace are identical.
RS-TIM alarm: (Regenerator Section Trace Identifier Mismatch)
Mismatch between expected and received RS Trace.
LOF error: Loss of frame alarm on received STM-1 signal. Thus, J0
is not available. Alarm status, OK or RS-TIM alarm will be latched.
CRC error: CRC error in received Regenerator Section Trace.
(Only in User Message mode)
Invalid: Not valid User Message received.
RF ID: (The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio node):
- Not Used/Used: RF_ID MS3 bit on/off
- Expected: The value to be compared with the RF ID byte in the
received SOH. If mismatch, AIS will be inserted if the Insert AIS
when RF ID mismatch is checked. The Expected field normally
contains the same values as the RF ID value in the Path Trace
property sheet at the transmit end of the path.
- Received: he received RF ID value.
B4029
291
- Status: The status of the RF ID:
OK: Expected and received RF ID values are identical.
RF-ID alarm: Mismatch between expected and received RF ID values.
Invalid: Not valid RF ID value received.
2.13
Transmission TX Interface Nodes

The following table describes the configuration function for the TX
Interface nodes in the Transmission branch.
Context menu:
Menu text
Path Trace
2.13.1
Description
Displays the Path Trace property sheet
Path Trace
The Path Trace functionality and the AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) functionality are used to test that the received STM-1 frames are the frames we
want to receive (correct routing, frequency alignment. . . . ). This is done
by either inserting a fixed byte or an user defined ASCII sting in the J0 slot
in the RSOH, or a two bit RF ID symbol at the transmit end. This is done
from the path trace sheet. The RF ID functionality is only available at the
Radio side. The radio that receives the STM-1 frames must have the same
Trace string (J0) or RF ID defined in the AIS insert sheet. If theres a mismatch,
an AIS can be inserted. An AIS can also be inserted if the HBER threshold
is exceeded.
292
B4029
Operators Guide
Regenerator Section Trace (J0):
- Enabled: When checked, a trace string is inserted into the J0 byte of
the RSOH.
- Fixed byte: The Regenerator Section Trace String is one byte ( =8bit)
long.
- User Message (ASCII): The Regenerator Section Trace String is a
user defined message ASCII (sixteen bytes =128bits long)
- Trace String: The ASCII string or fixed byte to be inserted into the J0
byte in the RSOH.
RF ID: (The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio node):
- Not Used/Used: RF_ID MS3 bit on/off
NE.
B4029
293
2.14
SOH Frame
The use of Section OverHead is implemented according to ITU-T Recommendation G.707. Each byte in the SOH frame is a 64kb/s channel. Some
of the SOH bytes are dedicated for framing, performance monitoring and
internal signalling, while others may be used for 64kb/s user channels,
Wayside traffic, SVCE telephone or DCC.
2.14.1
System Description
SOH on a 2+1 system with LPT
Interface SOH BUS
Common SOH BUS
SU
SOH
Adapter
InterfaceP R
ModulatorP
TransceiverP
Modulator1
Transceiver1
Modulator2
Transceiver2
Line
Line
Interface1 R
P
Interface2 R
Branching
Line
P
The Section OverHead is managed using a set of SOH buses in the

connection panel. In the radio direction (over the radio hop), a subset of
the inserted SOH bytes are protected by redundancy. Some of the SOH
bytes are transmitted on two of the traffic channels (channel 1 and 2 in a
N+0 system or channel 1 and P in a N+1 system). One bus, denoted SOH
Common Bus is provided for the redundancy protection. This bus provides connections to the OH adapter on the Supervisory Board, which is
connected to the Modem Boards of channel 1 and 2 in a N+0 system or
channel 1 and P in a N+1 system. The Common Bus is automatically
chosen if the selected SOH byte is available on the Common Bus.
294
B4029
Operators Guide
These SOH bytes are included in the Common Bus:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU
B1 MS1 MS2 E1 UN UN F1 NU
D1 MS3 UN D2 UN UN D3 UN
AU - Pointer
B2 B2 B2 K1 UN UN K2 UN
D4 UN UN D5 UN UN D6 UN
S1 UN UN UN UN M1 E2 NU
9
NU
NU
UN
UN
UN
UN
UN
NU
System
Common Bus
Common Bus (N+0 systems only)
The SOH bytes of the Common Bus are inserted to the SOH of the traffic
at the Modem Boards of both channels. Thus, in a N+1system configuration, protection switching must be taken into account when selecting SOH
bytes in the radio direction:
If a SOH byte is inserted into the Common Bus, the corresponding SOH
bytes on all other channels are marked unavailable, because these SOH
bytes would be overwritten by the Common Bus in case of protection
switching.
If a SOH byte not included in the Common Bus subset is selected on
channel P, this byte may be overwritten by any channel using protection.
If a SOH byte not included in the Common Bus subset is selected on
channel 1N, the SOH byte will never be overwritten by the Common
Bus, but will follow regular protection switching.
Four buses, denoted SOH Interface Buses, are provided for SOH connections to different Interface Baseband Boards. Thus, user channels can
be configured to use the SOH on four different traffic channels and
directions simultaneously in addition to the Common Bus. Each Interface
SOH Bus has two data lines where one half of the SOH is transmitted on
each data line, denoted line A and line B.
B4029
295
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU
AU - Pointer
System
2.14.2
Line A
9
NU
NU
UN
UN
UN
UN
UN
NU
Line B
DCC
Data Communication Channels can be inserted into the SOH in both Radio
and Line directions. Single or multiple SOH bytes (D1-D3 or D4-D12)
can be selected. In the Radio direction the DCC is inserted directly into the
RSOH adapter on the Supervisory Board. DCC insertion is therefore
limited to the Common Bus subset and multiple D1-D3 in the Radio
direction. (multiple D4-D12 is also available in the Radio direction in
N+0 systems).
2.14.3
Wayside Channel
At each Interface Baseband Board a Wayside Channel can be inserted into
the SOH in either the Radio or Line direction [See the Wayside Channel
property sheet]. Note that insertion of Wayside into the SOH does not
use any SOH Bus, since the SOH bytes are directly inserted at the Interface
Baseband Boards.
The following bytes are used by the Wayside Channel:
296
B4029
Operators Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU
AU - Pointer
System
2.14.4
9
NU
NU
UN
UN
UN
UN
UN
NU
Wayside Channel
64kb/s Channels
Four 64kb/s Channels can be inserted into a SOH Bus at each SVCE Board.
[See the 64kb/s channels property sheet]. Each 64kb/s ASIC can only
be connected to one of the data lines of a SOH bus (Interface SOH Bus line
A, Interface SOH Bus line B or Common Bus). Therefore, 64kb/s channel
1 and 2 must be configured to use the same data line and 64kb/s channel
3 and 4 must be configured to use the same data line.
COMMON_SOH_BUS
A
B INTF_SOH_BUS1
MUX
CH1-G703 CO/CONTRA
CH2-V11
64kb/s
ADAPTER
COMMON_SOH_BUS
CH3-G703 CO/CONTRA
CH4-V11
64kb/s
ADAPTER
A
B INTF_SOH_BUS1
MUX
2.14.5
A
INTF_SOH_BUS2
B
A
INTF_SOH_BUS3
B
A
INTF_SOH_BUS4
B
A
INTF_SOH_BUS2
B
A
INTF_SOH_BUS3
B
A
INTF_SOH_BUS4
B
SVCE Telephone
The service telephone channel can be inserted into the SOH in the Radio
direction. [See the SVCE Telephone property page]. The selection of
SOH bytes is limited to E1, E2 and F1.
B4029
297
2.14.6
SOH Selection Dialogue box

The SOH Selection dialogue box displays the current use of the SOH on
a specific traffic channel and direction.

Grid control: Displays the current use of the SOH for a specific traffic
channel and direction. Click in the grid to change the SOH byte selection.
Radio buttons: Select multiple SOH bytes D1-D3 or D4-D12 by selecting the corresponding radio button (applies to DCC only).
OK button: Applies the current selection and closes the dialogue box.
Help: Displays help for the dialogue box.
A brief description of the dedicated SOH bytes (see ITU-T Recommendation
G.707 for more information):
A1: Frameword (11110110).
A2: Frameword (00101000).
J0: Regenerator Section Trace [See the Path Trace property sheet].
B1: BIP-8 checksum for the regenerator section [See the Performance
chapter].
B2: BIP-24 checksum for the multiplex section [See the Performance
chapter].
MS1 and MS2: Media Specific bytes. Used by Nera equipment for Radio
Protection Switching communication.
298
B4029
Operators Guide
MS3: Media Specific byte. Used by Nera equipment for:
- RF-id:
[See the Path Trace property sheet].
- Remote Reset:
[See the Remote Reset property sheet].
- ATPC: control signal for ATPC.
[See the Power property sheet].
- E/M-Wire for E1, E2 and F1.
[See the SVCE Telephone property sheet].
K1 and K2: Intended to be used for Multiplex Section - Automatic
Protection Switching. Only a part of K2 is used by Nera equipment:
- MS-RDI: Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication.
S1: Synchronization status.
M1: Multiplex Section - Remote Error Indication (MS-REI).
[See the Performance chapter]
SOH bytes available for user channels (64kb/s, Wayside Channel, DCC,
SVCE telephone).
E1: Intended to be used as Orderwire for regenerator section termination.
Default SOH byte for SVCE telephone. Can be used for SVCE telephone,
64kb/s or DCC.
E2: Intended to be used as Orderwire for multiplex section termination. Can
be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s or DCC.
F1: Intended to be used for V.11 or G703 interfaces. Default SOH byte for
64kb/s channels. Can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s or DCC.
D1-D3: Intended to be used as embedded control channel for regenerator
section. Single bytes can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s or DCC.
Multiple bytes can be used for DCC.
D4-D12: Intended to be used as embedded control channel for multiplex
section. Single bytes can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s or DCC.
Multiple bytes can be used for DCC.
NU: National Use. The use may be restricted by national regulations.
Can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s, DCC or Wayside Channel.
UN: Unused. Can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s, DCC or Wayside
Channel.
The E1, E2 and F1 SOH bytes can be used in conjunction with the E/M Wire
(MS3 SOH byte) when control signals are required (E.g. if using a PABX
adapter on a SVCE Board).
B4029
299
3.0
Alarm Management
Different functions are provided for acquisition, presentation and storage
of alarm data:
Current alarm status and historical alarm information can be collected from
the network element and presented in different user interfaces.
Individual alarm properties (severity, mask, name, etc.) can be customized.
Historical alarm data can be logged into a database system.
The different user interfaces can be displayed from context menus on the
tree-nodes in the Explorer View. The Explorer View tree structure can be
used as a display filter since only alarms located at the selected tree-node
and below will be included in the different user interfaces. E.g. if you are
only interested in alarms on received line signal for channel 1, use the
alarm context menu in the \Transmission\Ch.1\Line\In node.
3.1
Alarm Data Acquisition

Alarm information can be gathered by two different methods:
Polling: NEW may regularly request alarm update information from the
NE. The alarm polling mechanism can be configured from the Polling
dialogue box in the Fault menu. See the NEW-NMS User Manual for
details]. Note that alarm polling must be enabled to ensure detection of
Lost contact with the NE.
Notifications: The network element has the ability to instantly report
alarm events. See the Notifications property sheet for details.
3.2
Alarm Severity Levels

Colours are used to indicate the alarm severity of the network element.
Each alarm severity class has a corresponding colour:
300
B4029
Operators Guide
Severity
Color (default)
Normal
Green
Warning
Yellow
Minor alarm
Dark yellow
Major alarm
Orange
Critical alarm
Red
No contact
Blue
Logged off
Magenta
Description
No alarms or warnings have been reported from the
network element
Indicates the detection of a potential or impending
service-affecting fault, before any significant affects
have occurred. Action should be taken to further
diagnose and correct the problem in order to prevent it
from becoming a more serious service-affecting fault.
Indicates the existence of a non-service-affecting fault
condition and that corrective action should be taken in
order to prevent a more serious fault.
Signifies that a service-affecting condition has
occurred and urgent corrective action is required.
The most severe alarm. It signifies that a serviceaffecting condition has occurred and an immediate
corrective action is required.
Indicates that no communication is achieved with the
network element.
The NEW user is not logged on to the element.
The colors associated with the specific alarm severity levels can be customized in the Colors dialog box
in the Fault menu.
Dialogue Controls:
Severity list: Displays the different severity levels with the corresponding colour. Double-click in a colour cell to select a new colour.
OK button: Applies the current dialogue box settings and closes the
dialogue box.
Defaults button: Resets the colour selections to default.
B4029
301
3.3
Current Alarms
NEW displays current alarm status in several different user interfaces:
Explorer View: The tree-node symbols are coloured according to the
highest severity level of the active alarms located at the tree-node and
below. See the Explorer View section for details.
Current Alarms View: Displays a list of all active alarms from the
selected tree-node and below.
Map View: The NE symbol is coloured according to the highest severity
level of the active alarms in the NE. (Only available in NEW-NMS mode.
See the NEW-NMS User Manual for details.)
The different boards/units displays alarm status by LEDs.
3.3.1
Current Alarms View

The Current Alarms View displays the current alarms hierarchically below
the selected tree-node. Note that this view has a resizeable frame.
View Controls:
Number of alarms: The number of alarms displayed in the list.
Freeze: When checked, the list is not updated when changes in the alarm
status are detected.
302
B4029
Operators Guide
Alarm list: Displays all active alarms located in the selected tree-node
and below. Note that a brief alarm description can be displayed from a
context menu on the selected alarm.
- Severity: The severity level attribute of the alarm. This level can be
customized in the Alarm Edit property sheet.
- Alarm text: The name of the alarm. The name can be customized in the
Alarm Edit property sheet.
- Node: The location of the alarm.
Help button: Displays help for this View.
3.4
Historical Alarm Data

The Supervisory Board contains an alarm history log that can keep up to
10000 alarm events. These events can be uploaded to NEW and displayed
in the NE Log View and/or stored in the database system.
Note that the local alarm log in the NE is deleted when the Supervisory
Board SW is restarted.
3.4.1
NE Alarm Log Manager

The NE Alarm Log Manager property sheet displays/configures the alarm
logging mechanism on the Supervisory Board.
B4029
303
Help button: Displays help for the active page
Log full action: Determines how new events are processed when the log
is full.
- Wrap: The oldest log event is overwritten by the latest event.
- Halt: New events are discarded. No events will be overwritten.
Alarm threshold (%): An alarm (EVENT-LOG-EXC-THRESHOLD) is
generated when this threshold is exceeded.
Max. number of events: The maximum number of events in the log.
Number of events: The current number of events in the log.
Masked alarm severity levels: When checked, alarm events with the
corresponding severity level will not be added to the log.
View button: Uploads and displays log records from the NE log.
Delete button: Deletes the entire NE log.
3.4.2
NE Alarm Log View

Historical alarm events can be uploaded from the NE and displayed in
NEW. When pressing View in the NE Alarm Log Manager, a dialogue box
is displayed prompting for the number of records to upload. This gives the
user the possibility to reduce the upload time.
The NE Alarm Log View retrieves and displays records from the local fault
log.
304
B4029
Operators Guide
View Controls:
Number of events: The number of log records displayed in the list.
Alarm event list: Displays the uploaded alarm events.
- NE Log ID: Unique event identifier created by the Supervisory Board.
- Status: The status change:
Raised: The alarm became active.
Cleared: The alarm became inactive.
Floating: The alarm has been toggled 3 or more times within a 5
second window of time.
- Severity: The severity level attribute of the alarm. This level can be
customized in the Alarm Edit property sheet.
- Node: The location of the alarm.
- Alarm ID: Identifies the alarm type. Used internally to map the alarm
to a corresponding name.
- Alarm text: The name of the alarm. The name can be customized in the
Alarm Edit property sheet.
Refresh button: Removes all entries in the list and initiates a new upload
of log records.
Help button: Displays help for this view.
3.4.3
Database Logging
NEW provides functions for retrieval and logging of historical alarm data
into a database system. See the NEW-NMS User Manual for details.
B4029
305
3.5
Alarm Edit
The Alarm Edit property sheet displays/configures the alarm attributes.

Alarm list: Displays the alarm attributes for all alarms in the selected
tree-node and below.
- Node: The location of the alarm. (Cannot be modified).
- Alarm ID: Identifies the alarm type. Used internally to map the alarm
to a corresponding name. (Cannot be modified).
- Alarm name: The name of the alarm. Note the name is not stored in the
NE. If changing the name attribute, this alarm name will not appear in
other instances of NEW.
- Severity: The severity level associated with the alarm.
- Blocking: When checked the alarm is blocked. A blocked alarm will
be excluded from the current alarm status and the historical alarm
logging.
- Active: Whether a logical HIGH or LOW shall be regarded as an active
alarm for external alarms.
Modification Range: This option simplifies changing settings on identical alarms from the selected node and below.
- Only selected alarm(s): Changes will only be performed on the
selected alarms.
- All identical alarms: Changes will be performed on all alarms in the
list having the same alarm Ids as the selected alarms.
306
B4029
Operators Guide
To change the alarm attributes:
There are two ways of editing the alarm settings in the list:
In-cell editing: To edit single selections:
- For the Name, Severity and Active attributes:
Double-click in the cell.
Change the attribute in the in-cell control (combo-box or edit box).
Click outside the in-cell control.
- For the Blocking attribute:
Click in the cell to toggle the check button.
Context menu: To edit single or multiple selections:
- Select single or multiple alarms.
- Right-click within the selection.
- In appearing context menu, choose wanted setting.
- In appearing dialogue box, edit chosen setting and press OK.
- If multiple alarms have been selected, confirm editing of all alarms by
pressing Yes in appearing message box.
After finishing editing alarm settings, press Set to send the changes to the
network element.
B4029
307
4.0
Performance Measurements
Different functions are provided for acquisition, presentation and storage
of performance data. Cumulative measurements, Periodic measurements
(15Min, 24Hour and Month) and Thresholds can be displayed from
context menus on the tree-nodes in the Explorer View. The Explorer View
tree structure can be used as a display filter since only measurements
located at the selected tree-node and below will be included in the
different user interfaces. E.g. if you are only interested in measurements
on received line signal for channel 1, use the performance context menu
in the \Transmission\Ch.1\Line\In node.
4.1
Measurement Types
Error Pulses:
- B1: One byte of the SOH frame is allocated for regenerator section
error monitoring. This B1 byte contains a Bit Interleaved Parity 8
(BIP-8) code using even parity. The BIP-8 is computed over all bits of
the previous STM-1 frame after scrambling and is placed in byte B1
of the current frame before scrambling.
Parity: The number of parity errors detected.
Block: The number of blocks in which one or more parity errors are
detected.
- B2: Three bytes of the SOH frame is allocated for multiplex section
error monitoring. The B2 bytes contain a Bit Interleaved Parity 24
(BIP-24) code using even parity. The BIP-24 is computed over all bits
of the previous STM-1 frame except for the first three rows of SOH
and is placed in the B2 bytes of the current frame before scrambling.
detected.
- M1 REI: The M1 byte of the SOH frame is allocated for multiplex
section remote error indication. The M1 byte conveys the count of
interleaved bit block errors that have been detected by the BIP-24
(B2) at the remote multiplex site.
detected.
308
B4029
Operators Guide
G.826: ITU-T Recommendation that defines standardized performance
measurements. These measurements are calculated based on the block
pulses described above.
- B1:
SES: Severely Errored Seconds. The number of one-second periods
which contains > 30% errored blocks or at least one Severely
Disturbed Period (SDP). A SDP is a period where Loss Of Signal
(LOS) or Loss Of Frame (LOF) has been detected. SES is a subset
ofES.
ES: Errored Seconds. The number of one second periods with one
or more errored blocks.
BBE: The number of Background Block Errors. An errored block
not occurring as part of an SES.
UAS: The number of UnAvailable Seconds. A period of unavailable
time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES events. These ten
seconds are considered to be a part of the unavailable time. A new
period of available time begins at the onset of ten consecutive nonSES events. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of available
time.
- B2: Contains SES, ES, BBE and UAS as described above.
- M1 REI: Contains SES, ES, BBE and UAS as described above.
OOF: Out Of Frame.
- Seconds: The number of one-second periods with one or more OOF
events.
- Pulses: The number of OOF events detected.
FEC: A Forward Error Correction function is provided in the Viterbi
TCM mechanism.
- Pulses: The number of Forward Error Corrections.
RPS: Radio Protection Switching. See ETSI DE/TM 04037 for more
information.
- PSRC: Protection Switch Request Count. Counts the number of
switch requests. A switch request is an activation of switch initiation
criteria that may lead to automatic switches.
- PSAC: Protection Switch Actual Count. Counts the number of actual
switches for a regular channel to protection.
- PSAD: Protection Switch Actual Duration. The number of one second
periods in which a channel is actually switched for at least a fraction
of that second.
- PSRSAD: Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration.
The number of one second periods in which, at least for fraction of that
second, a protection switch request is active on a channel carrying
regular traffic and the request cannot be serviced.
B4029
309
4.2
Measurement Nodes
The different performance measurements are performed at Interface
Baseband Boards and Modem Boards as displayed in the picture below.
Performance Measurements in a 1+1 system (Illustrates one traffic direction)
Modem BD P
Transceiver Unit P
Transceiver Unit P
Modem BD P
Interface Baseband BD 1
Line
Modem BD 1
Transceiver Unit 1
Branching
Branching
Interface Baseband BD 1
Ch1
Radio
Transceiver Unit 1
Modem BD 1
B1, B2, M1 REI

00F
B1 (Switched)
B2 (Switched)
M1 REI (Switched)
00F (Switched)
B1 (Unswitched)
FEC ( Unswitched)
00F ( Unswitched)
(per RF Channel)
The measurements performed at the Interface Baseband Board are presented

at the corresponding channel in the Transmission branch in the node-tree.
In a N+1 system configuration, the received radio signal path is depending on
whether the channel is using protection or not. Since the Interface Baseband
Board measures performance data after the RX-Switch the measurements
presented in the Transmission branch are regarded as switched measurements while the measurements presented at the Modem Board are regarded
as unswitched measurements in a N+1 system configuration.
Measurement locations in the Explorer View node-tree:
\Transmission\Channel\Radio\RX:
- Error Pulses: B1, B2, M1 REI.
- G.826: B1, B2, M1 REI.
- OOF.
\Transmission\Channel\Line\In:
- Error Pulses: B1, B2, M1 REI.
- G.826: B1, B2, M1 REI.
- OOF.
\Equipment\\Modem Board\Radio Port\RX:
- Error Pulses: B1.
- G.826: B1.
- FEC.
- OOF.
- RPS: PSRC, PSAC, PSAD, PSRSAD. Only present in N+1 system
configurations.
310
B4029
Operators Guide
4.3
Cumulative Measurements
Cumulative measurements are counting the number of errors since the last
counter reset. These counters can be manually reset from NEW, and will
also be reset by a SW Restart of the corresponding board/unit.
The Performance Cumulative property sheet displays cumulative measurements.

Measurement list: Displays all measurements from the tree-node that
this property-sheet was launched from and below.
- Node: The location of the measurement.
- Source: Measurement type (See the Measurement Type section for
detailed description)
- SES, ES, UAS, BBE, Parity, Blocks, Seconds, etc: Measurement
values (See the Measurement Type section for detailed description)
- Elapsed time: The elapsed time since the start of the measurement.
- Status: The status of the measurement:
Running: The measurement is valid and running.
Unit not responding: The Supervisory Board has lost contact with
the board/unit where the measurement is located.
LOF: One or more Loss Of Frame events have been detected during
the measurement period. (Applies to B1, B2 and M1 REI error
pulses only)
B4029
311
MS-AIS: One or more MS-AIS events have been detected during
the measurement period. (Applies to B2 and M1 REI error pulses
only)
MS-RDI: One or more MS-RDI events have been detected during
the measurement period. (Applies to M1 REI error pulses only)
Sync loss: One or more Sync loss events have been detected during
the measurement period. (Applies to FEC pulses only)
Overflow: The counter has wrapped. (Applies to FEC pulses only)
Reset button: Reset the cumulative counters selected in the list.
NE. The cumulative performance data is updated continuously (5 seconds interval).
312
B4029
Operators Guide
4.4
Periodic Measurements (15Min, 24Hour and Month)

Period measurements are measurements cumulated over a predefined
period of time (15 minutes, 24 hours and 1month). The start times of these
measurements are also predefined:
15Min measurements start at h:00:00, h:15:00, h:30:00 and h:45:00,
where h denotes hour.
24Hour measurements start at each midnight (00:00:00).
Month measurements start at midnight at each month transition.
Note that the NE is using GMT time, such that the measurement start time
is relative to GMT time and not to your PCs local time.
For 15Min measurements the NE keeps the 16 latest periods. For 24Hour
and Month measurements only the latest period is kept.
Note that the running performance measurements will be reset due to a SW
restart on the corresponding board/unit. E.g. restarting an Interface Baseband Board will reset all periodic measurements on that board.
The Performance Registers property sheet displays period measurements.
B4029
313
Get button: Retrieves performance measurements from the Network Element
Measurement list: Displays all measurements from the tree-node that this
property-sheet was launched from and below.
- Source: Measurement type (See the Measurement Type section for
detailed description)
- Reg. #: The sequence number of the performance register. Register 0
is the running measurement, register 1 is the latest completed measurement, , register 16 is the oldest completed measurement.
- SES, ES, UAS, BBE, Parity, Blocks, Seconds, etc: Measurement
values (See the Measurement Type section for detailed description)
- Start time: The start time of the measurement period.
- Status: The status of the measurement:
Data OK: The measurement has been conducted over a complete
period.
Running: The measurement is not yet completed.
Data not OK: Measurement period is incomplete (due to SW
restart), or the NE clock has been adjusted more than 10 seconds
during the measurement period.
4.5
Thresholds
Thresholds can be configured such that alarms are generated when performance measurements exceed the specified limits. Note that performance measurements are evaluated continuously through the measurement
period, and an alarm is raised immediately when the threshold value is
exceeded. An active performance threshold alarm is not cleared before a
measurement period has completed with a measurement value less than
the corresponding threshold.
Note that threshold alarms are masked by default [see the Alarm Edit
property sheet].
The Performance Threshold property sheet displays/configures alarm
thresholds.
314
B4029
Operators Guide

Measurement list: Displays all threshold settings from the tree-node
that this property-sheet was launched from and below.
- Source: Measurement type (See the Measurement Type section
for detailed description)
- Interval: The measurement period (15Min, 24Hour or Month).
- SES, ES, UAS, BBE, Seconds, etc: Measurement threshold values.
Double-click in the cell to edit. (See the Measurement Type
section for detailed description)
NE.
4.6
Database Logging
NEW provides functions for retrieval and logging of G.826 measurements
into a database system. See the NEW-NMS User Manual for details.
B4029
315
5.0
Analog Measurements
Different functions are provided for acquisition and presentation of
Analog measurements. In addition accumulated RF input level measurements can be displayed in the RF Statistics view.
5.1
Analog measurements
The Analog property sheet displays the current analog values. The Explorer View tree structure can be used as a display filter since only measurements located at the selected tree-node and below will be included in the
Analog property sheet.

316
B4029
Operators Guide
Measurement list: Displays all analog measurements from the treenode that this property-sheet was launched from and below.
- Analog Data: The name of the value.
- Nominal: The nominal value (if a nominal value is defined)
- Value: The measurement value.
- Status: Status of the measurement:
Data OK: The displayed data has been retrieved from the NE.
Unit not responding: The Supervisory Board has lost contact with
the board/unit where the measurement is located.
Data not OK: The analog value cannot be read due to internal errors
on the board/unit.
5.2
RF Statistics
The RF input level can be collected over a period of time and displayed in
a cumulative plot. The RF Statistics View can be displayed from the
context menu on the \Transceiver\Antenna\RX node in the Explorer
View.
B4029
317
Controls:
Graph: Displays a plot of the cumulative measurements. The horizontal
axis represents the input level in dBm and the vertical axis represent
cumulative probability. The cumulative probability is given by number
of samples / total number of samples. The chart will appear when the first
measurement is retrieved, but no graph will appear until fading has
occurred.
Number of samples: The number of samples collected and used in the
plot.
Polling interval: The sampling rate in seconds.
Start time: The time when the measurement was started
Delete Stat button: Deletes the measurements and resets the plot.
Start/Stop Polling button: Starts or stops the polling for RF measurements. Note that measurements will still be collected when closing this
view. The plot is not reset when polling is stopped
NE.
The chart can be copied to the clipboard if the view has focus and Copy
(Ctrl+C) is selected from the Edit menu. The chart can then be pasted into
a Microsoft Word document or equal.
318
B4029
Operators Guide
6.0
Security Management
NEW and the InterLink network elements support access control and
logging of user operations (configuration, login, logout, etc.).
6.1
User Account Administration

In order to get information from or configure a NE, the user must have a
user account in NEW and a user account in the NE. When a user logs onto
NEW, the same user account information (user name and password) is
used to automatically log onto the discovered network elements.
The access control supports four levels of user privileges:
Passive: Passive users are only able to monitor data. They are not able
to collect data or change the network configuration.
Active: Active users are able to collect data and change configuration
related to data collection (alarm editing, notifications, men at work,
performance thresholds, etc.).
Master: Master users have access to all NEW commands, except those
attended with user account administration.
Admin: Admin users have access to all NEW commands. The Admin
user is the administrator and will be responsible for adding, deleting and
managing user accounts and privileges.
User account administration requires Admin user level. All users can
change their own password.
B4029
319
6.1.1
Add User
User accounts can be added to NEW and network elements from the Add
User dialogue box.

User ID: The name of the user account. The ID can contain up to 8
characters (letters and/or numbers).
Password: The password must contain minimum 8 and maximum 12
Confirm password: Retype the password in this field.
+/- buttons: Increases/decreases the user account privileges for all
selected items in the list.
List: Displays all network elements that supports access control.
OK button: Adds a new user to the selected elements and closes the
dialogue box.
Apply button: Adds a new user to the selected elements. The dialogue
box remains open.
Note that the User ID and passwords are case sensitive.
320
B4029
Operators Guide
6.1.2
Edit User
Existing user accounts can be modified from the Edit User dialogue box:
Modify the password
Change the user level
Add/Remove the user account on individual elements

User ID: Contains the name of all user accounts detected in NEW and
the discovered network elements
Password: The password must contain minimum 8 and maximum 12
Confirm password: Retype the password in this field.
+/- buttons: Increases/decreases the user account privileges for all
selected items in the list.
List: Displays all network elements that supports access control. The user
level No rights means that the user does not have an account in the NE.
OK button: Edits the selected user account and closes the dialogue box.
Apply button: Edits the selected user account. The dialogue box remains
open.
Note that the User ID and passwords are case sensitive.
B4029
321
6.1.3
Delete User
User accounts can be deleted using the Delete User dialogue box.

User ID: Contains the name of all user accounts detected in NEW and
the discovered network elements.
List: Displays all network elements that contains the selected user
account.
OK button: Deletes the user account in the selected elements and closes
the dialogue box.
Apply button: Deletes the user account in the selected elements. The
dialogue box remains open.
322
B4029
Operators Guide
6.1.4
Change Password
User may change their own password in the Change Password dialogue
box.

Old Password: The password must contain minimum 8 and maximum 12
New Password: The password must contain minimum 8 and maximum
12 characters (letters and/or numbers).
Confirm new password: Retype the new password in this field.
Note that the passwords are case sensitive.
B4029
323
6.2
Security Event Logging

The Supervisory Board stores configuration and security operations into
a local security log. This log can keep up to 1000 security events. The
security events can be uploaded to NEW and displayed in the NE Security
Log View and/or stored in the database system.
Note that the NE Security Log is not deleted when the Supervisory Board
SW is restarted.
6.2.1
NE Security Log Manager

The NE Security Log Manager property sheet displays/configures the
security logging mechanism on the Supervisory Board.

Log full action: Determines how new events are processed when the log
is full.
- Wrap: The oldest log event is overwritten by the latest event.
- Halt: New events are discarded. No events will be overwritten.
324
B4029
Operators Guide
Alarm threshold (%): An alarm (SECURITY-LOG-EXC-THRESHOLD)
is generated when this threshold is exceeded.
Max. number of events: The maximum number of events in the log.
Number of events: The current number of events in the log.
View button: Uploads and displays log events from the NE log.
Delete button: Deletes the entire NE log.
6.2.2
NE Security Log View

Security events can be uploaded from the NE and displayed in NEW. When
pressing View in the NE Security Log Manager, a dialogue box is
displayed prompting for the number of events to upload. This gives the user
the possibility to reduce the upload time.
The NE Security Log View retrieves and displays records from the local
security log. Note that some events (user actions) are stored in the NE as
two records (i.e. Add User, Edit User, Delete User), but are presented in
NEW as one event.
B4029
325
View Controls:
Number of events: The number of log events displayed in the list.
Security event list: Displays the uploaded security events.
- NE Log ID: Unique event identifier created by the Supervisory Board.
- User ID: The user account name for the user that performed the
operation.
- Operation: Brief description of the configuration or security operation performed.
- Status: The status of the operation:
OK: The attempted operation succeeded.
Not OK: The attempted operation did not succeed (illegal configuration parameters or security violation).
- Time: The date/time of the event.
Refresh button: Removes all entries in the list and initiates a new upload
of log records.
6.2.3
Database Logging
NEW provides functions for retrieval and logging of security events into
a database system. See the NEW-NMS User Manual for details.
326
B4029
Operators Guide
7.0
7.1
Operation
Handset
The equipment is delivered with a DORO ROYAL handset for operation of
Service Telephone.
EL
3
4
CA
LLINH IGH
G S / LOW
IGN
AL
L EV
11
10
REPEAT VOLUME
STORE/ MEMORY
MIC BLOCK
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Loudspeaker
Key pad
R-Button
Store/Mic Block button
Repeat button
Connection Breakers
Connector
Microphone
Memory button
Volume control
Calling signal level control
CONNECTION
Connect the enclosed cable to the telephone handset and the terminal on
one of the two phone connectors on the Connection Panel.
To remove the cable from the handset or the Connection Panel, press the
elastic pin on the cable connector and pull out the cable.
B4029
327
ADJUSTABLE CALL SIGNAL
A switch for adjustment of the calling signal volume, is placed on the right
side of the phone. The signal has two levels; low and high.
CALLING
Dial the desired number
Terminate the conversation by placing the handset in the holder or on a
table with the CONNECTION BREAKERS facing down.
REDIALING
To redial the last number, push the REDIAL button.
Note that only the last manually dialled number is redialled, not abbreviated numbers.
ABBREVIATED NUMBERS
The telephone has the capacity of storing 10 abbreviated numbers.
When a number is stored as an abbreviated number, the dialling can be
performed by pushing two keys only.
STORING ABBREVIATED NUMBERS
Lift the handset and push the STORE/MIC BLOCK button
Push the MEMORY button
Select the desired abbreviated number (0-9) by pushing the

corresponding key number.
Dial the desired telephone number (max. 21 digits).
Push the STORE/MIC BLOCK button.
Place the Handset on hook.

To change an abbreviated number, the old number can be overwritten.
Note that telephone numbers with more than 21 digits, must be stored as
two or more abbreviated numbers.
Dialling ABBREVIATED NUMBERS
Lift the handset off hook.
Push the MEMORY button
Select the desired abbreviated number by pushing the keys (0-9).

The corresponding abbreviated number will automatically be dialled.
MICROPHONE BLOCK
By pushing the STORE/MIC button, during a conversation, the microphone will be blocked. Repush the button and the microphone is active.
VOLUME CONTROL
The loudspeaker volume can be adjusted in two steps during a conversation, by adjusting the VOLUME control.
328
B4029
Operators Guide
8.0
Note!
Frequency setting
To Access the tuning screws, remove the sealing screws and washers.
After the tuning, the sealing washer (Nera article code: 97W35A-C6) must
be replaced to ensure proper sealing.
Tx Tuning
Alarm LED
Rx Tuning
Fig. 8-1 DRO Tuning

B4029
329
8.1
Setting of Frequency
Highlite the actual Transceiver unit to be tuned. Right click and chose
"Configuration" and "Frequency".
Transceiver Unit Ch.1
330
B4029
Operators Guide
See Section IV para 2.1.2.5 for setting of frequency.
B4029
331
8.2
DRO Tuning
Highlite the actual Transceiver unit to be tuned. Right click and chose
"Configuration" and "DRO Tuning"
Transceiver Unit Ch.1
332
B4029
Operators Guide
8.2.1
Tx
See Section IV, para 2.1.2.5
Select Tx tuning in the DRO Tuning Mode box. Press the "Set" button.
B4029
333
The red arrow indicates which way to adjust the DRO. In addition The
Alarm LED will blink when the DRO must be turned clockwise. If the Alarm
LED is OFF, the DRO must be turned counter-clockwise. When the Alarm
LED is ON the Synthesizer is in lock.
Press the "Set" button to update the window.
334
B4029
Operators Guide
8.2.2
Rx
See Section IV, para 2.1.2.5
Select Rx tuning in the DRO Tuning Mode box. Press the "Set" button.
B4029
335
The red arrow indicates which way to adjust the DRO. In addition The
Alarm LED will blink when the DRO must be turned clockwise. If the Alarm
LED is OFF, the DRO must be turned counter-clockwise. When the Alarm
LED is ON the Synthesizer is in lock.
Press the "Set" button to update the window.
336
B4029
Fault Finding
SECTION V
Fault Finding
B4029
337

338
B4029
Fault Finding
1.0
Alarms and Description
Alarm Location Alarm Name

Equipment
MEN-AT-WORK
EVENT-LOG-EXCTHRESHOLD
SECURITY-LOGEXC-THRESHOLD
RPS-OW-FAILUREDIR1
RPS-OW-FAILUREDIR2
RPS-REMOTEFAILURE-DIR1
RPS-REMOTEFAILURE-DIR2
RPS-FAIL-REMOTETXBRIDGE-DIR1
RPS-FAIL-REMOTETXBRIDGE-DIR2
Baseband
Subrack
Power Filtering
Board
I2C-INVENTORY
Description
Indicates that the NE is being
upgraded /repaired by an
Operator. This alarm can be
set from the Equipment context
menu in NEW.
Event log has exceeded the
predefined capacity threshold.
This threshold can be
configured from the "NE Alarm
Log Manager" in NEW.
Security log has exceeded the
predefined capacity threshold.
This threshold can be
configured from the "NE
Security Log Manager" in
NEW.
RPS not receiving MS1/MS2
byte information
RPS not receiving MS1/MS2
byte information
Remote side failed to execute
requested action
Remote side failed to execute
requested action
Protection switch failure due to
unintended remote TX Bridge
alteration
Protection switch failure due to
unintended remote TX Bridge
alteration
EEProm I2C not responding
I2C-ANALOGUE
Analogue I2C not responding
I2C-INVENTORY
SUPPLY-VOLTAGE Input power on Power Filtering
Board has gone outside the
predefined limits. 38V
Alarm Display & I2C-ANALOGUE
Relay Board
I2C-INVENTORY
DROP-IN 3.3V
NL2000 Alarm & Display board
HW alarm
B4029
ID Severity
2000 WARNING
2011 WARNING
2014 WARNING
2450 MINOR
2451 MINOR
2452 MINOR
2453 MINOR
2454 MINOR
2455 MINOR
2019 WARNING
2018 WARNING
2019 WARNING
2033 WARNING
2018 WARNING
2019 WARNING
2038 WARNING
339
Supervisory
NEED-CONFIG
Board
ILLEGAL-BOARDPOSITION
LOST-CONTACTWITH-UNIT
NEW-BOARDDETECTED
UNIT-BEINGREPLACED
I2C-ANALOGUE
I2C-INVENTORY
DOWNLOAD-INPROGRESS
340
Description
The board needs configuration
This alarm is generated on the
board if the specific board
does not contain valid system
configuration data (typically
after a system configuration or
board replacement process).
This alarm initiates an
immediate configuration
download from the Supervisory
Board to the board. If this
alarm is generated on the
Supervisory Board the system
configuration must be set from
NEW, using the Unit
Housekeeping Wizard or the
function.
The board has been placed in
an illegal slot position. The
board should be removed.
Indicates loss of
communication between the
Supervisory Board and the
specific board/unit
A board/unit has been
detected in an empty slot or a
slot that is configured to be
used for a different type of
board/unit. When this alarm is
detected by NEW the
configuration context menu of
the board/unit is replaced with
a "New Board Detected" menu
item. Select this menu
command to display the NEW
Board Detected dialog box
where an appropriate action
can be performed.
This alarm is generated when
the reset button on the board
has been pressed for less than
2 seconds. The alarm stays
active for 15 seconds and is
indicated on the board by a
flashing alarm diode. When
this alarm is active the board
can be replaced in a controlled
manner. On the Supervisory
Board this alarm initiates a
replace unit process.
Download of software is under
progress.
ID
Severity
3500 MAJOR
3501 WARNING
3502 MAJOR
3503 WARNING
3504 WARNING
2018 WARNING
2019 WARNING
2012 WARNING
B4029
Fault Finding
Supervisory
BELOW +3.3V
Board
Cont.
BELOW +5V
Description
Voltage from the DC-DC
converter below limit
BOOT-HW-ERROR- Errors detected by boot code
DETECTED
during startup.
BELOW +48V
RTC-LOW-BATTERY The battery that powers the
Real Time clock is low.
RPS-NEED-CONFIG RPS needs configuration
Su lost contactvwith RPS
RPS-LOSTCONTACT-WITHUNIT
RSOH-PLL-DIR1
RSOH adapter Antenna
Direction1. PLL out of lock
RSOH-PLL-DIR2
RSOH adapter Antenna
Direction2. PLL out of lock
COMMON-BUSAlarm on either 64kb/s TX or
ALARM
64kb/s RX commonbus
MODEM-SOH-CHP- SOH timeslot alarm
DIR1 (N+1)
MODEM-SOH-CHP- SOH timeslot alarm
DIR2 (N+1 )
MODEM-SOH-CH1- SOH timeslot alarm
DIR1
DIR2
DIR1 (N+0)
DIR2 (N+0)
RPS-NEED-SW
The RPS module does not
have valid SW
XILINX-NEED-SW
The Xilinx module does not
have valid SW
EXTERN-ALARM-1 Configured as alarm input.
Alarm name is configurable
from "Alarm Edit" property
sheet in NEW
EXTERN-ALARM-2 ref External alarm 1
B4029
ID Severity
2002 WARNING
2003 WARNING
2225 MINOR
2020 WARNING
2017 WARNING/
2456 MAJOR
2457 MAJOR
1016 CRITICAL
1017 CRITICAL
1018 MINOR
1019 MINOR
1020 MINOR
1021 MINOR
1022 MINOR
1023 MINOR
1024 MINOR
2222 MAJOR
2223 MAJOR
2500 WARNING
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
341
Alarm Location
Supervisory
Board
Cont.
342
Alarm Name
EXTERN-ALARM-7
EXTERN-ALARM-8
NEED-SW
Description
ref External alarm 1
ref External alarm 1
The board/unit does not have
valid SW
ID
2506
2507
2221
Severity
WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR
B4029
Fault Finding
SVCE Board
NEED-CONFIG
NEW-BOARDDETECTED
UNIT-BEINGREPLACED
I2C-ANALOGUE
I2C-INVENTORY
B4029
Description
NEW, using the Unit
function.
Indicates loss of
specific board/unit
detected by NEW the
can be performed.
ID Severity
3500 MAJOR
3501 WARNING
3502 MAJOR
3503 WARNING
3504 WARNING
2018 WARNING
2019 WARNING
343
SVCE Board
DOWNLOAD-INCont.
PROGRESS
BELOW +3.3V
Description
progress.
BELOW +5V
BELOW +12
BELOW -5V
BELOW -12
64K- 1
64k Channel 1 SOH
busTimeslot alarm (Tx+Rx)
64K- 2
64k Channel 2 SOH
64K- 3
64k Channel 3 SOH
64K- 4
64k Channel 4 SOH
SERVICE-PH
Service phone Commonbus
timeslot alarm (Tx+Rx)
64K-LOOP-1
64 kb channel 1 loop is active
64K-LOOP-2
64K-LOOP-3
64K-LOOP-4
NEED-SW
valid SW
BOOT-MONITOR-IN- ACF board is in boot monitor
USE
mode
DETECTED
during startup.
344
ID Severity
2012 WARNING
2002 WARNING
2003 WARNING
2004 WARNING
2005 WARNING
2021 WARNING
2025 MINOR
2026 MINOR
2027 MINOR
2028 MINOR
2029 MINOR
2015
2016
2030
2031
2221
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
MAJOR
2224 WARNING
2225 MINOR
B4029
Fault Finding
Modem Board
NEED-CONFIG
NEW-BOARDDETECTED
UNIT-BEINGREPLACED
I2C-ANALOGUE
I2C-INVENTORY
B4029
Description
NEW, using the Unit
function.
Indicates loss of
specific board/unit
detected by NEW the
can be performed.
ID Severity
3500 MAJOR
3501 WARNING
3502 MAJOR
3503 WARNING
3504 WARNING
2018 WARNING
2019 WARNING
345
Modem Board
DOWNLOAD-INCont.
PROGRESS
BELOW +3.3V
Description
progress.
BELOW +5V
MISSINGModem or transceiver are
CALIBRATIONmissing their calibration data in
DATA
flash
RPS-BUS-FAILURE Failure to read modem RPS
bus
NEED-SW
valid SW
USE
mode
DETECTED
during startup.
THRESHOLDIf the current 15 minute period
15MIN-PSRC
exceeds the predefined
threshold for Service Request
Counter, this alarm is raised.
The alarm is cleared when a
new period starts. The
threshold can be configured
from the "Performance
Thresholds" property sheet in
NEW.
15MIN-PSAC
threshold for Service Actual
NEW.
15MIN-PSAD
Duration, this alarm is raised.
NEW.
346
ID Severity
2012 WARNING
2002 WARNING
2003 WARNING
2032 MAJOR
2458 MINOR
2221 MAJOR
2224 WARNING
2225 MINOR
3018 WARNING
3019 WARNING
3020 WARNING
B4029
Fault Finding
Modem Board
THRESHOLDCont.
15MIN-PSRSAD
THRESHOLD24HOUR-PSRC
THRESHOLD24HOUR-PSAC
THRESHOLD24HOUR-PSAD
THRESHOLD24HOUR-PSRSAD
B4029
Description
If the current 15 minute period
threshold for Request Service
Actual Counter, this alarm is
raised. The alarm is cleared
when a new period starts. The
NEW.
NEW.
NEW.
NEW.
NEW.
ID Severity
3021 WARNING
3022 WARNING
3023 WARNING
3024 WARNING
3025 WARNING
347
Modem Board
THRESHOLDCont.
MONTH-PSRC
Modem Board Radio Port - TX
348
Description
NEW.
MONTH-PSAC
new period starts.
MONTH-PSAD
NEW.
MONTH-PSRSAD
NEW.
TRELLIS PLL
The Trellis coder is out of
lock.(CNF35C Asic)
RT-PLL
The Sorp 38,88 MHz PLL is
out of lock.
IF-MOD
Loss of IF 350MHz
LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active)
LOC
Loss of clock (SORP)
MS-AIS-INS
Alarm indication signal is
inserted.
ID Severity
3026 WARNING
3027 WARNING
3028 WARNING
3029 WARNING
1007 CRITICAL
1008 CRITICAL
1200
2010
1011
1003
CRITICAL
WARNING
CRITICAL
MAJOR
B4029
Fault Finding
Modem Board - IF-DEM
Radio Port - RX RF-ID
Description
Loss of incoming 140MHz.
Wrong RF-ID received
compared to configuration.
HBER
Indicator for BER > 1e-3
LBER
EW
LOC
LT-PLL
The Line Transmit 155MHz
PLL is out of lock.
CLOCK-PLL
Clock-PLL out of lock
CARRIER-PLL
Carrier-PLL out of lock
AD-TIMING-PLL
AD-timing -PLL out of lock
G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 15 minute period
15MIN-B1
threshold for B1, this alarm is
set. The alarm is cleared when
a new period starts. The
NEW.
G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 24 hour period
24HOUR-B1
NEW.
G826-TRESHOLD- If the current month period
MONTH-B1
threshold for month, this alarm
is raised. The alarm is cleared
NEW.
TRESHOLD-15MIN- If the current 15 minute period
OOF
threshold for OOF, this alarm
NEW.
B4029
ID Severity
1300 CRITICAL
1105 MAJOR
1102
1103
1104
2010
1011
1100
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
WARNING
CRITICAL
CRITICAL
1106
1107
1108
3000
CRITICAL
CRITICAL
CRITICAL
WARNING
3003 WARNING
3006 WARNING
3015 WARNING
349
Modem Board - TRESHOLDRadio Port RX 24HOUR-OOF
Cont.
TRESHOLDMONTH-OOF
Interface
NEED-CONFIG
Baseband Board
350
Description
If the current 24 hour period
NEW.
If the current month period
NEW.
NEW, using the Unit
function.
Indicates loss of
specific board/unit
ID Severity
3016 WARNING
3017 WARNING
3500 MAJOR
3501 WARNING
3502 MAJOR
B4029
Fault Finding
Interface
NEW-BOARDBaseband Board DETECTED
Cont.
Description
detected by NEW the
can be performed.
UNIT-BEINGThis alarm is generated when
REPLACED
I2C-ANALOGUE
I2C-INVENTORY
DOWNLOAD-INDownload of software is under
PROGRESS
progress.
BELOW +3.3V
BELOW +5V
SYNC-PLL
Sync PLL out of lock
WAYSIDE-LOOP-FE Wayside far-end loop on
Interface Baseband Board is
active
WAYSIDE-LOOP-NE Wayside near-end loop on
Interface Baseband Board is
active
PRBS-INSERTED
A Pseudo Random Bit
Sequence signal is inserted
into the wayside channel.
WAYSIDE-INP
No input signal is detected on
Wayside channel.
WAYSIDE-AIS-INP Alarm indication signal is
detected on Wayside channel.
WAYSIDE-OUTPAIS is detected on the
AIS
Wayside traffic output.
RPS-SETFailure to set on interface
PROTECT-FAILED board
B4029
ID Severity
3503 WARNING
3504 WARNING
2018 WARNING
2019 WARNING
2012 WARNING
2002 WARNING
2003 WARNING
1012 CRITICAL
2007 WARNING
2008 WARNING
2009 WARNING
1005 MINOR
1006 WARNING
1101 WARNING
2459 MINOR
351
Alarm Location
Interface
Baseband Board
Cont.
Description
Failure to set on interface
board
Failure to set on interface
board
Failure to read modem RPS
bus
RPS-CHAN-NOTProtection switch failure due to
ALIGNED
no alignment
NEED-SW
valid SW
USE
mode
DETECTED
during startup.
Interface
BIAS
The laser bias is out of limits.
Baseband Board
Sign of age and degradation.
- Optical Port
(SMF type only)
Interface
TX-OUT
The output power has
Baseband Board
increased 2dB, or the
- Optical Port analogue measurement of
TX
PO_MON is outside predefined
limits.
LASER-OFF
The laser is off.
LT-PLL
PLL is out of lock.
LOC
Interface
Baseband Board LOC
- Optical Port RX
Interface
LT-PLL
Baseband Board
PLL is out of lock.
- Electrical Port - LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active)
Out
LOC
TX-LOC
Loss of clock. STM-1 electrical
interface
Interface
Baseband Board LOC
- Electrical Port - RX-LOC
Loss of clock. STM-1 electrical
In
interface
Interface
RT-PLL
The Sorp 38,88 MHz PLL is
Baseband Board
out of lock.
- Modem Port LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active)
TX
LOC
352
Alarm Name
RPS-SET-AISINSERT-FAILED
RPS-SET-TXBRIDGE-FAILED
RPS-BUS-FAILURE
ID Severity
2460 MINOR
2461 MINOR
2458 MINOR
2463 MINOR
2221 MAJOR
2224 WARNING
2225 MINOR
1402 WARNING
1400 CRITICAL
1401 WARNING
1100 CRITICAL
2010
1011
2010
1011
WARNING
CRITICAL
WARNING
CRITICAL
1100 CRITICAL
2010 WARNING
1011 CRITICAL
1014 CRITICAL
2010 WARNING
1011 CRITICAL
1013 CRITICAL
1008 CRITICAL
2010 WARNING
1011 CRITICAL
B4029
Fault Finding
Alarm Location
Interface
Baseband Board
- Modem Port RX
Alarm Name
LOOPING-ENABLED
LOC
RR-PLL
MS-AIS-INS
Transceiver Unit LOST-CONTACTWITH-UNIT
Description
Looping is enabled (active)
PLL out of lock
inserted.
Indicates loss of
specific board/unit
HSB-RELAY
DOWNLOAD-INDownload of software is under
PROGRESS
progress.
NEED-FREQUENCY A RF unit need to be
configured with Tx and Rx
frequency.
MISSING
Modem or transceiver are
CALIBRATIONmissing their calibration data in
DATA
flash
MISSING-LOXPIC LO synch missing
SYNCHRONIZATIO
N
BELOW +3.3V
BELOW +5V
BELOW +11V
BELOW +15V
BELOW +48V
BELOW -15V
FAN-ALARM
Problem with fan
FAN2-ALARM
Problem with fan
NEED-SW
valid SW
USE
mode
DETECTED
during startup.
Transceiver Unit ATPC
The regulation loop for the
- Antenna Port
ATPC is not working. Software
generated alarm based on
alarm condition on local LOF
on Rx and remote LOF on Rx .
B4029
ID
2010
1011
1015
1003
Severity
WARNING
CRITICAL
CRITICAL
MAJOR
3502 MAJOR
2012 WARNING
2013 MAJOR
2032 MAJOR
1511 CRITICAL
2002 WARNING
2003 WARNING
2022 WARNING
2023 WARNING
2020 WARNING
2024 WARNING
2034 WARNING
2037 WARNING
2221 MAJOR
2224 WARNING
2225 MINOR
1507 MINOR
353
Transceiver Unit IF-INP
- Antenna Port TX
RF-OUT
RF-MUTE
LO
LO-TUNINGWARNING
HIGH-TEMPPOWERTRANSISTOR
Transceiver Unit RF-INPUT- Antenna Port - WARNING
RX
Empty Slot
LO
LO-TUNINGWARNING
NEW-BOARDDETECTED
Transmission - LOS (M)

Ch. - Radio - RX
LOF (M)
MS-AIS (M)
MS-RDI (M)
354
Description
IF input signal from the Modem
Board is missing
The output power is low. Down
more than 3dB from nominal
value
The RF transmitter is muted.
Local Oscillator is out of lock.
The LO needs to be tuned
Temperature warning for
power transistor
ID Severity
1500 CRITICAL
1501 MAJOR
1508 WARNING
1505 MAJOR
1512 WARNING
1513 WARNING
1504 WARNING
The RF input level is outside
the predefined thresholds.
These thresholds can be
configured from the "RF
Power" property sheet in NEW.
Local Oscillator is out of lock.
1505 MAJOR
The LO needs to be tuned
1512 WARNING
detected by NEW the
can be performed.
Loss Of Signal: No signal is
received on the interface.
Loss of Frame: No valid frame
is detected on the received
signal.
Alarm indication signal
detected. MS termination only
Remote defect indicator
3501 WARNING
3503 WARNING
1000 MAJOR
1001 MAJOR
1002 WARNING
1004 WARNING
B4029
Fault Finding
Transmission G826-TRESHOLDCh. - Radio - Rx 15MIN-B1 (I) (*)
Cont.
Description
NEW.
15MIN-B2 (I) (*)
a new period starts. Only for
MS termination. The threshold
can be configured from the
"Performance Thresholds"
property sheet in NEW.
15MIN-REI (I) (*)
threshold for REI, this alarm is
when a new period starts.
Only for MS termination. The
NEW.
OOF (I) (*)
NEW.
24HOUR-B1 (I) (*)
NEW.
24HOUR-B2 (I) (*)
NEW.
B4029
ID
Severity
3000 WARNING
3001 WARNING
3002 WARNING
3015 WARNING
3003 WARNING
3004 WARNING
355
Transmission - G826-TRESHOLDCh. - Radio - Rx 24HOUR-REI (I) (*)
Cont.
Description
NEW.
TRESHOLDIf the current 24 hour period
24HOUR-OOF (I) (*) exceeds the predefined
NEW.
MONTH-B1 (I) (*)
NEW.
MONTH-B2 (I) (*)
NEW.
MONTH-REI (I) (*)
NEW.
356
ID Severity
3005 WARNING
3016 WARNING
3006 WARNING
3007 WARNING
3008 WARNING
B4029
Fault Finding
Transmission - TRESHOLDCh. - Radio - Rx MONTH-OOF (I) (*)
Cont.
Transmission Ch. - Line - In
B4029
Description
If the current month period
NEW.
RS-TRACEMismatch between configured
MISMATCH (M)
string and received string
MS-AIS-INS (M)
inserted.
MS-AIS-SWITCHED Switched Alarm indication
(N+1) (I) (*)
signal detected. MS
termination only
MS-RDI-SWITCHED Switched Remote defect
(N+1) (I) (*)
indicator detected. MS
termination only
MS-AIS-INSSwitched Alarm indication
SWITCHED (N+1) (I) signal inserted. MS
(*)
termination only
LOS (I)
Loss Of Signal: No signal is
received on the interface.
LOF (I)
Loss of Frame: No valid frame
is detected on the received
signal.
MS-AIS (I)
Alarm indication signal
MS-RDI (I)
Remote defect indicator
15MIN-B1 (I)
NEW.
15MIN-B2 (I)
a new period starts. Only for
MS termination. The threshold
can be configured from the
"Performance Thresholds"
property sheet in NEW.
ID Severity
3017 WARNING
1010 MAJOR
1003 MAJOR
1027 WARNING
1028 WARNING
1029 MAJOR
1000 MAJOR
1001 MAJOR
1002 WARNING
1004 WARNING
3000 WARNING
3001 WARNING
357
Transmission - G826-TRESHOLDCh. - Line - In
15MIN-REI (I)
Cont.
Description
NEW.
OOF (I)
NEW.
24HOUR-B1 (I)
NEW.
24HOUR-B2 (I)
NEW.
24HOUR-REI (I)
NEW.
358
ID Severity
3002 WARNING
3015 WARNING
3003 WARNING
3004 WARNING
3005 WARNING
B4029
Fault Finding
Transmission - TRESHOLDCh. - Line - In
24HOUR-OOF (I)
Cont.
Description
ID
Severity
3016 WARNING
NEW.
3006 WARNING
G826-TRESHOLDIf the current month period
MONTH-B1 (I)
NEW.
3007 WARNING
MONTH-B2 (I)
NEW.
3008 WARNING
MONTH-REI (I)
NEW.
3017 WARNING
TRESHOLDIf the current month period
MONTH-OOF (I)
NEW.
RS-TRACEMismatch between configured
1010 MAJOR
MISMATCH (I)
string and received string
MS-AIS-INS (I)
1003 MAJOR
inserted.
(M): Alarm is detected on corresponding Modem Board
(I): Alarm is detected on corresponding Interface Baseband Board.
(*) On N+1 systems with no Low Priority Traffic there are no Interface Baseband Boards for
Ch.P and the alarms marked (I) are not present in the Transmission - Ch. - Radio - RX node.
B4029
359

360
B4029
Unit Replacement
SECTION VI
Unit Replacement
B4029
361

362
B4029
Unit Replacement
1.0
1.1
Replacement of Boards/Units
Replacement Rules
The new Board/Unit must have exactly the same unit code (Code:) as the
Board/Unit to be replaced.
The Board/Unit revision (Rev:) is on the format "R1A" (revision 1A). The
new board must have the same or higher digit (1) on the revision tag to be
compatible with the one to be replaced. The letter (A) is not significant for
interchangeability. See a typical label below:
The Supervisory Board keeps a copy of the configuration and SW on the

different boards/units. If a board/unit is replaced, the configuration will be
automatically downloaded from the Supervisory Board to the new Board/
Unit, and new SW must be downloaded manually if required.
1.2
Replacement procedures
1.2.1
Transceiver Unit, Modem Board, Interface Baseband

Board, SVCE Board
- Press the board/units Reset button for at least 2 seconds but less than 5
seconds. The UNIT-BEING-REPLACED alarm is generated and the board/
units alarm LED starts blinking.
- Replace the board/unit.
- The Supervisory Board automatically starts downloading configuration
data to the new board/unit. If the SW version of the new board/unit differs
from the corresponding active SW component on the Supervisory Board
the SW component must be downloaded to the new board/unit (a DOWNLOAD-IN-PROGRESS alarm is generated on the board/unit).
1.2.2
Supervisory Board
Start the Replace Unit Wizard from the Configuration menu on the SU Board
node. This wizard guides you through the steps of copying the configuration
data from the replaced/old Supervisory Board to the replacement/new
Supervisory Board. The NE must be directly connected to a serial port in
B4029
363
NEW in order to copy the configuration:
- Step 1: Introduction
- Step 2: Detects whether NEW is connected directly through a serial port
to NE where the Supervisory Board is to be replaced. Also retrieves
Element ID data from the old Supervisory Board.
- Step 3: Uploads configuration data from the old Supervisory board.
- Step 4: Activates the UNIT-BEING-REPLACED alarm on the Supervisory
Board. The boards alarm LED starts blinking. The board can now be
replaced.
- Step 5: When the board has been replaced and the new Supervisory
Board SW has booted, this step detects the new Supervisory Board on the
serial port.
- Step 6: Copies Element ID data to the new Supervisory Board.
- Step 7: Downloads configuration data to the new Supervisory Board.
The replacement process is now finished.
364
B4029
Unit Replacement
2.0
Fig. 2-1
B4029
Unit Removal
Removal of Sub-Rack cover
365
Fig. 2-2
366
Removal of Boards from Sub-Rack
B4029
Appendices
Section VII
Appendices
B4029
367

368
B4029
Appendices
Appendix I
Frequency Plans
1.0
5 GHz
05A1
IL05A (4.4-5.0 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.746-5 Annex 2

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
05B1
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RF-freq.
[MHz]
4730
4758
4786
4814
4842
4870
4898
4926
4954
4982
IL05B (4.4-5.0 GHz) (40 MHz): ITU-R F.1099-3 Annex 1, 1

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B4029
RF-freq.
[MHz]
4418
4446
4474
4502
4530
4558
4586
4614
4642
4670
RF-freq.
[MHz]
4430
4470
4510
4550
4590
4630
4670
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RF-freq.
[MHz]
4730
4770
4810
4850
4890
4930
4970
369
2.0
Lower 6 GHz
06A1
IL06A (5.9-6.4 GHz) (29.65 MHz): ITU-R F.383-7

IL06A (5.9-6.4 GHz) (29.65 MHz): FCC 101.147 - (i-8)
IL06A (5.9-6.4 GHz) (29.65 MHz): CEPT 14-01 E
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
06A2
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6197.24
6226.89
6256.54
6286.19
6315.84
6345.49
6375.14
6404.79
IL06A (5.9-6.4 GHz) (29.65 MHz): SRSP-305.9 Group B

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
370
RF-freq.
[MHz]
5945.20
5974.85
6004.50
6034.15
6063.80
6093.45
6123.10
6152.75
RF-freq.
[MHz]
5930.37
5960.02
5989.67
6019.32
6048.97
6078.62
6108.27
6137.92
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6182.41
6212.06
6241.71
6271.36
6301.01
6330.66
6360.31
6489.96
B4029
Appendices
3.0
Upper 6 GHz
06B1
IL06B (6.4-7.1 GHz) (40 MHz): ITU-R F.384-7 Rec.1

IL06B (6.4-7.1 GHz) (40 MHz): CEPT 14-02 E
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
06C1
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6445
6475
6505
6535
6565
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6785
6815
6845
6875
6905
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6595
6625
6655
n
#
1
2
3
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6695
6725
6755
IL06C (6.4-7.1 GHz) (27 MHz): ITU-R F.384-7 Rec.1

n
#
1
2
3
4
B4029
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6800
6840
6880
6920
6960
7000
7040
7080
IL06C (6.4-7.1 GHz) (30 MHz): SRSP-306.4 Sec. 4.2.3b

n
#
1
2
3
06C3
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IL06C (6.4-7.1 GHz) (30 MHz): SRSP-306.4 Sec. 4.2.3a
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
06C2
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6460
6500
6540
6580
6620
6660
6700
6740
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6460
6500
6540
6580
n
#
1
2
3
4
RF-freq.
[MHz]
6800
6840
6880
6920
371
4.0
7 GHz
07A1

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
07A2
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7317
7345
7373
7401
7429
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7138,5
7166,5
7195,5
7222,5
n
#
1
2
3
4
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7299,5
7327,5
7355,5
7383,5
IL07A (7.1-7.4 GHz) (28 MHz): CEPT 02-06 Annex 1, a

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
372
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
IL07A (7.1-7.4 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.385-7 Rec.1-4, Arr. #1

n
#
1
2
3
4
07A3
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7121
7149
7177
7205
7233
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7142
7170
7198
7226
7254
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7296
7324
7352
7380
7408
B4029
Appendices
07A4

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
07A5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7289
7317
7345
7373
7401
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7149
7177
7205
7233
n
#
1
2
3
4
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7310
7338
7366
7394
IL07A (7.1-7.4 GHz) (30 MHz): SRSP-307.1 Sec. 4.2.1.6
n
#
1
B4029
n
#
1
2
3
4
5

N
#
1
2
3
4
07A6
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7128
7156
7184
7212
7240
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7140
n
#
1
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7315
373
07B1

IL07B (7.4-7.7 GHz) (28 MHz): CEPT 02-06 Annex 1, a
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
07B2
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7596
7624
7652
7680
7708
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7457
7485
7513
7541
7569
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7625
7653
7681
7709
7737

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
374
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
IL07B (7.4-7.7 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 3

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
07B3
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7442
7470
7498
7526
7554
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7428
7456
7484
7512
7540
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7610
7638
7666
7694
7722
B4029
Appendices
07B4

n
#
1
2
3
4
07B5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7438.5
7466.5
7494.5
7522.5
7550.5
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7599.5
7627.5
7655.5
7683.5
7711.5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7428
7456
7484
7512
7540
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7589
7617
7645
7673
7701
IL07B (7.4-7.7 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.385-7 Rec.1-4, Arr. #5

n
#
1
2
3
4
B4029
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7610
7638
7666
7694

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
07B7
n
#
1
2
3
4

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
07B6
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7456
7484
7512
7540
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7466,5
7494,5
7522,5
7550,5
n
#
1
2
3
4
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7627,5
7655,5
7683,5
7711,5
375
07B8
IL07B (7.4-7.7 GHz) (30 MHz): SRSP-307.1 Sec. 4.2.2.6

n
#
1
07B9
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7590
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7435
7463
7491
7519
7547
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7596
7624
7652
7680
7708
IL07B (7.4-7.7 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.385-7 Rec. 1-4, Arr. #14
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
376
n
#
1
IL07B (7.4-7.7 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.385-7 Rec. 1-4, Arr. #7
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
07B10
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7440
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7442
7470
7498
7526
7554
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7603
7631
7659
7687
7715
B4029
Appendices
07C1
IL07C (7.4-7.9 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 4

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
07D2
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7687
7715
7743
7771
7799
7827
7855
7883
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7302
7337
n
#
1
2
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7463
7498
IL07E (7.1-7.7 GHz) (30 MHz): 7.1-7.7 Arr. #1

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B4029
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IL07D (7.3-7.6 GHz) (35 MHz): 7.3-7.6 Arr. #2
n
#
1
2
07E1
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7442
7470
7498
7526
7554
7582
7610
7638
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7140
7170
7200
7230
7260
7290
7320
7350
7380
7410
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7440
7470
7500
7530
7560
7590
7620
7650
7680
7710
377
5.0
8 GHz
08A1
IL08A (7.7-8.3 GHz) (29.65 MHz): ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
08A2
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8059.02
8088.67
8118.32
8147.97
8177.62
8207.27
8236.92
8266.57
IL08A (7.7-8.3 GHz) (29.65 MHz): ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1, 4

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
378
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7747.70
7777.35
7807.00
7836.65
7866.30
7895.95
7925.60
7955.25
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7732.875
7762.525
7792.175
7821.825
7851.475
7881.125
7910.775
7940.425
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8044.195
8073.845
8103.495
8133.145
8162.795
8192.445
8222.095
8251.745
B4029
Appendices
08A3
IL08A (7.7-8.3 GHz) (30 MHz): SRSP-307.7 Sec. 4.2.3

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
08B1
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8040
8070
8100
8130
8160
8190
8220
8250
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7926
7954
7982
8010
8038
8066
8094
8122
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8192
8220
8248
8276
8304
8332
8360
8388
IL08B (7.9-8.4 GHz) (28 MHz): CEPT 02-06 Annex 4

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B4029
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IL08B (7.9-8.4 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
08B2
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7740
7770
7800
7830
7860
7890
7920
7950
RF-freq.
[MHz]
7919
7947
7975
8003
8031
8059
8087
8115
8143
8171
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8229
8257
8285
8313
8341
8369
8397
8425
8453
8481
379
08C1
IL08C (8.2-8.5 GHz) (28 MHz): 8.2-8.5 Arr. #1

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
08C2
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8371
8399
8427
8455
8483
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8293
8307
8321
8335
8349
8363
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8412
8426
8440
8454
8468
8482
IL08C (8.2-8.5 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.386-6 Rec. 1, Arr. #1

n
#
1
380
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
IL08C (8.2-8.5 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3, 1.1 Arr. #1
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
08C3
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8217
8245
8273
8301
8329
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8303.344
n
#
1
RF-freq.
[MHz]
8454.958
B4029
Appendices
6.0
11 GHz
11A1
IL11A (10.7-11.7 GHz) (40 MHz): ITU-R F.387-8 Rec. 1

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
11A2
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
RF-freq.
[MHz]
11245
11285
11325
11365
11405
11445
11485
11525
11565
11605
11645
11685

IL11A (10.7-11.7 GHz) (40 MHz): CEPT 12-06 Rec. 1
n
#
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
B4029
RF-freq.
[MHz]
10715
10755
10795
10835
10875
10915
10955
10995
11035
11075
11115
11155
RF-freq.
[MHz]
10735
10775
10815
10855
10895
10935
10975
11015
11055
11095
11135
n
#
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
RF-freq.
[MHz]
11265
11305
11345
11385
11425
11465
11505
11545
11585
11625
11665
381
11A3

IL11A (10.7-11.7 GHz) (40 MHz): CEPT 12-06 Rec. 3
IL11A (10.7-11.7 GHz) (40 MHz): FCC 101.147 (o-7) config #1
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
11B1
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
RF-freq.
[MHz]
11225
11265
11305
11345
11385
11425
11465
11505
11545
11585
11625
11665
IL11B (10.7-11.7 GHz) (30 MHz): FCC 101.147 - (o-6)

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
382
RF-freq.
[MHz]
10735
10775
10815
10855
10895
10935
10975
11015
11055
11095
11135
11175
RF-freq.
[MHz]
10715
10755
10795
10835
10875
10915
10955
10995
11035
11075
11115
11155
11185
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RF-freq.
[MHz]
11215
11245
11285
11325
11365
11405
11445
11485
11525
11565
11605
11645
11685
B4029
Appendices
11B2
IL11B (10.7-11.7 GHz) (30 MHz): SRSP-310.7 Sec. 4.1.3

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11B3
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RF-freq.
[MHz]
11215
11245
11275
11305
11335
11365
11395
11425
11455
11485
11515
11545
11575
11605
11635
11665
IL11B (10.7-11.7 GHz) (28 MHz): ITU-R F.387-8 Rec. 1

n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
B4029
RF-freq.
[MHz]
10725
10755
10785
10815
10845
10975
10905
10935
10965
10995
11025
11055
11085
11115
11145
11175
RF-freq.
[MHz]
10715
10755
10795
10835
10875
10915
10955
10995
11035
11075
11115
11155
n
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
RF-freq.
[MHz]
11245
11285
11325
11365
11405
11445
11485
11525
11565
11605
11645
11685
383

384
B4029

InterLink Split-Mount Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

InterLink Split-Mount Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

USER MANUAL

This page is intentionally left blank

During work within and close to the front of the antenna;

Before opening coaxial - or waveguide connectors carrying

Consider any incidentally open RF connector as carrying

This page is intentionally left blank

This equipment contains components which are sensitive to "ESD" (Electro

This page is intentionally left blank

DO NOT remove or insert the Transceiver group with DC power on.

To avoid traffic disturbance during maintenance on one of the RF

This page is intentionally left blank

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other

The Optical Interface must only be serviced by qualified personnel, who

This page is intentionally left blank

This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the

LITHIUM BATTERY WARNING!

This page is intentionally left blank

This section applies only to CE marked equipment

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (INFORMAL)

Refer to Declaration of Conformity for further details.

This page is intentionally left blank

This page is intentionally left blank

Unit Descriptions ........................................................ 45

Basic Planning ............................................................

Transportation & Handling ........................................

Equipment Rack Installation ......................................

ODU Installation ..........................................................

Waveguide Installation ............................................... 94

IDU/ODU Cable Installation ........................................ 96

SECTION III .......................................................... 99

External Connections .................................................

Configuration .............................................................. 137

Power on (incl. NEW-NMS start-up and initial config.) 139

Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with

Antenna alignment ......................................................

SECTION IV ......................................................... 145

Replacing Boards/Units: ............................. 166

Manual Switch Control ................................

SVCE Board Node .....................................

Alarm Management .....................................................

Performance Measurements ...................................... 308

Analog Measurements ................................................ 316

Security Management .................................................

Operation ..................................................................... 327

Frequency setting .......................................................

SECTION V .......................................................... 337

Alarms and Description .............................................. 339

SECTION VI ......................................................... 361

Replacement of Boards/Units ....................................

Unit Removal ............................................................... 365

Section VII ............................................................ 367

Frequency Plans ................................................

This page is intentionally left blank

This page is intentionally left blank

Definitions and terms used

Unprotected systems consisting of N (1 N 4)

Protected systems consisting of N (1 N 3) parallel

Hot Stand-by (HSB): Protected system consisting of 2 transceivers,

As ordinary Hot Stand-by, but with an additional

Available system configurations

Table 2.1.3.1 Available system configurations

ETSI or 19 rack which is used for the construction of terminals.

Basic system building block. Several variants can